
Book_TE^3_j 
I 84<S 






Cj 3 

H H 

O d 

N W 



s2 



5 

V K 

^ 



CO to 






« 



^ «o 

^ Sj* 



13 



^ to 

§ • 



S3 






'3 



ca 






<5 






1 

is 



& 



*0 

CO 












H 



FISK'S GREEK EXERCISES, 

I XT EE NTH STEREOTYPE EDITION. 



GREEK EXERCISES; 

6 

CONTAINING 

THE SUBSTANCE OF THE GREEK SYNTAX, 

ILLUSTRATED BY 



PASSAGES FROM THE BEST GREEK AUTHORS.. TO BE WRITTEN 
OUT FROM THE WORDS GIVEN IN THEIR SIMPLEST FORM. 



BY 

BENJAMIN FRANKLIN FISK. 



Consuetudo et exercitatio facilitatem maximo parit. 

Quintjl. 



ADAPTED TO THE AUTHOR'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 



BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED BY ROBERT S. DAVIS. 

NEW YORK: Robinson, Pkatt, Sc Co., and Colmns, Brother, be Co. 

PHILADELPHIA. Thomas. Cowpertiiwait, & Co. 

BALTIMORE: CusmNa .t Broth**, 

And sold by the trad.- generally 

1846. 



^ 






DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : 

District Clerk's Office. 

BE it remembered, that on the thirty-first day of March, A. D. 18S1, 
in the fifty- fifth year of the Independence of the United States of Amer- 
ica, Benjamin Franklin Fisk, of the said district, has deposited in this office 
the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as author, in the words 
following, to wit : — 

" Greek Exercises ; containing the Substance of the Greek Syntax, 
illustrated by Passages from the best Greek Authors, to be written out from 
the Words given in their simplest Form. By Benjamin Franklin Fisk. 
' Consuetudo et exercitatio facilitatem maxime parit.' — Quintil. Adapted 
to the Author's Greek Grammar." 

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled 
" An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of 
maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies 
during the times therein mentioned"; and also to an act, entitled "An 
act supplementary to an act, entitled, ' An act for the encouragement of 
learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors 
'and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned ' ; 
and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, 
and etching historical and other prints " 

JNO. W. DAVIS, 
Clerk of the District of Massachusetts. 



CAMBRIDGE : 

POLSOM, WELLS, AND THIJRSTON, 
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. 



PREFACE. 



Of all the methods proposed for facilitating the acquisition of a language, 
the writing of exercises is probably attended with greater success than 
any other By this the learner gains a knowledge of the signification 
of words, a readiness in varying such as are declinable, and a familiarity 
with their different constructions in sentences, which could hardly be so 
thoroughly attained in any other way, even with far more labor. 

With works designed to assist the learner in the performance of this 
important task, the languages of the more polished nations are furnished, 
and their utility is tested by the extensive use that is made of them. 
The Greek language, however, in this respect, has been less fortunate than 
others ; the books intended to provide for this mode of learning it, which 
is strongly recommended by many eminent scholars of the present day, 
being little used from the unskilfulness of their execution. 

But if composition in the Latin and other languages is found so condu- 
cive to a speedy and thorough acquaintance with them, it must be equally 
useful in a tongue so copious, so varied by inflection, and so diversified in 
construction, as the Greek ; and the little attention that has been paid to 
preparing the aids requisite for this end, is probably owing to the appre- 
hended difficulty of writing the Greek character. But this obstacle is by 
no means so formidable as it may at first seem ; and the labor of surmount- 
ing it will, it is believed, be far more amply recompensed, than any other 
performed by the Greek student. 

To furnish the learner with the means of practising this method with 
the greatest ease and profit, is the design of the following pages, which 
consist of examples carefully chosen from a large number, collected at a 
great expense of time and labor from the best Greek writers. In making 
the selection, whenever the scheme of the work allowed sufficient latitude 
of choice, those examples were always taken, in which some useful informa- 
tion is given, some beautiful sentiment conveyed, or some salutary maxim 



IV PREFACE. 

inculcated. The engraved page at the beginning exhibits the Greek letters 
in a fashion so convenient for writing, that very little practice will render 
the chirography of this language nearly as easy as that of the Latin. Of 
the two alphabets there given, the first is copied from Hodgkin's " Calli- 
graphia Graeca," and the other from the magnificent folio edition of Wolf's 
Homer, printed at Leipsic in 1 806. It will be observed that the two brief 
maxims from Isocrates, given also* as copies for imitation, comprise all 
the letters in their various forms. 

The order in which the rules are delivered is generally such, that each 
preceding one is of more frequent use than those by which it is followed ; 
and in pursuance of this plan, the rule for the agreement of a verb with its 
nominative is first given, as without it there can be no complete sentence ; 
this is followed by that for the agreement of an adjective with its substan- 
tive, by that for the accusative governed by verbs of a transitive significa- 
tion, and so on, for a considerable distance from the beginning. 

Great pains were taken, throughout the work, to exclude all such 
examples as required the knowledge of any subsequent rule ; and hence 
those under the first are necessarily very short, but those under the next 
somewhat longer, the power of lengthening them receiving an accession in 
every succeeding rule. In general, however, where greater extent was not 
requisite to the completeness of a sentence, or to the preservation of the 
author's meaning, it was thought advisable not to exceed three or four 
lines, that the rules might be more variously exemplified, and the volume 
not unprofitably swelled. 

As the nature of the work required the words of the translation to cor- 
respond as nearly as possible to the Greek, there was danger of too great 
a departure from the English idiom ; but that the commission of this 
fault might be avoided, great care was taken, especially for the illus- 
tration of the first rules, to select sentences capable of being rendered 
literally and (when such could be found) in the order of the words 
composing them. It is believed that the sense of the authors quoted 
has been given with fidelity ; but should any inaccuracies of this sort 
exist, they will be readily excused by those acquainted with the difficulty 
of collecting, arranging, and translating so much unconnected matter. 

The extracts were generally made from the original authors with no 
alteration. Some of them, however, it was necessary to adapt for 
admission into the work by retrenching words or parts of sentences ; 
by employing finite verbs instead of infinitives or participles ; or by 
discarding the peculiarities of dialects. But none of these licenses affect 



PREFACE. V 

the words adduced to illustrate the rule, and by none of them is a new 
meaning or different syntactical structure given to an author ; while 
without these slight modifications some of the most appropriate exam- 
pies would have been excluded, and the \alue of others greatly diminished. 

The accents are so useful an appendage to the written language, that it 
has an ungrateful appearance when divested of them ; and therefore the 
proper one is here given to every word, as in a lexicon. They can 
embarrass no one ; fur those who choose to write the Exercises without 
them, will entirely omit them ; and those who wish to discipline them- 
selves in suiting the accents to the various inflections and situations of- the 
words, will be enabled to do this, in almost every instance, by the rules 
in the Grammar on this subject. 

The Greek Grammar, published not long ago by the author of this 
volume, is the one to which reference is made throughout. The Notes 
subjoined to the Exercises are designed to assist the learner, by pointing 
out the anomalous and the less obvious regular inflections of words, and 
referr'ng him to those parts of the Grammar in which they are respec- 
tively treated. These, it is believed, with the Explanations and Direc- 
tions given below, are all the helps necessary or profitable for the pupil 
to possess ; but for the immediate convenience of such teachers as are 
unpractised in this mode of instruction, a Key has been published, which 
is intended exclusively for their use. 

Such a work as the present, it is obvious, could not be produced 
without the aid of many volumes not easy to be obtained ; and for some 
of the most valuable of these, the author has the pleasure of acknowl- 
edging, himself indebted to the kindness of John Pickering, Esq., to 
whom the cause of Greek letters in this country owes so much, as well 
for his own zealous and successful labors, as for encouragement afforded 
to the efforts of others in the same department of liberal studies. 

Waltham, Massachusetts, 
March, 1831. 



EXPLANATIONS AND DIRECTIONS. 



1. The italicized words in the translation show what part of each exam- 
pie is to illustrate the rule under which it is given. 

2. The letters affixed to words show the case, number, gender, voice, 
mode, participle, or tense, in which those words are to be written. 

n denotes nominative. in denotes indicative. 

g genitive. im imperative. 

d dative. o optative. 

a accusative. so subjunctive. 

v vocative. inf infinitive. 

pa participle. 

s singular. 

du dual. pr present. 

p plural. imp imperfect. 

ff first future. 

m 1 masculine. fa first aorist. 

f feminine. p perfect. 

ne neuter. pi pluperfect. 

sa ■ second aorist. 

a active. sf second future. 

p passive. ppf paulo-post-future. 

m middle. 

3. These letters are often omitted, where the section, in which the 
construction of a word has been exemplified, is either referred to, or 
supposed to be sufficiently obvious without any reference. Thus neither 
d is affixed to xogtxph in Example 747., nor S to t/j in Ex. S24., because 
of the references made in those places. Also Xiy-viv is, given without g in 
Ex. 452., and <r<pa,T^x without a in Ex. 212., because it will be recollected 
that the preposition Ik governs the genitive and verbs of a transitive sig- 
nification the accusative. Moreover the particle of, before substantives in 
the translation, was generally thought a sufficient sign of those genitives 
which are governed by substantives, or by partitives, &c, as of the geni- 
tive of IxxQu in Ex. .599., and of that of ffrgarnyo; in Ex. 691.*; and 
sometimes in like manner to or for alone denotes the dative after verbs, 
as that of Zih s in Ex. 1072. 



EXPLANATIONS AND DIRECTIONS. Vll 

4. In all the remaining instances the learner is to be guided by the 
translation, rendering the nominative by the nominative, the singular by 
the singular, &c. ; thus, 

the nominative Philip, in Ex. 1 16., by the nom. Ql\i*-xos ' 

the singular stone, in Ex. 91., by the ace. sing, of xitas ' 

the plural riches, in Ex. 152., by the plur. of ^JJ/tta ' 

the active verb slay, in Ex. 59., by the pres. act. of airoxniva ' 

and receive, in Ex. 604 , by the pres. mid. of Vi%op.eu ' 
the passive verb are educated, in Ex. 61., by the pres. pas. of •rathiuu ' 
the indicative needest, in Ex. 732., by the pres. indie, of tiof/oci ' 
the imperative watch, in Ex. 357., by the pres. irnperat. of tpv\eLrru ' 

and let him court, in Ex. 678., by the third pers. sing. pres. 

irnperat. of &£ja«i/'a * 
the infinitive to slay, in Ex. 194., 'by the pres. inf. of ktuvu ' and 

to come, in Ex. 509., by the second aor. inf. act. of t£%of*eu ' 
the participle having heard, in Ex. 512., by the first aor. part, of 

clkoC'm ' and being asked, in Ex. 175., by the pres. part. pas. of 

IPOJTCtOJ ' 

the present throws, in Ex. 91., by the pres. of p'nrrw ' 

the imperfect was, in Ex. 500 , by the imperf. of tlfti ' 

the first future will deny, in Ex. 79 , by the first future of upiopcti ' 

the perfect has been saved, in Ex. 51., by the perf. pas. of auZ,u ' 

the pluperfect had Jled, in Ex. 531., by the plup. of tpiuycu ' and 

had done by that of toAu . 
the comparative more useful, in Ex. 459., by the comp. of xgfoipot ' 
the superlative most rigid, in Ex. 437., by the superl. of axftGzs • 

and most, in Ex. 578., by the superl. of vroXus. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



I. A verb agrees with its nominative in num- 
ber and person. Grammar, Syntax, Rule III. 

Active. 

1. I have, thou sleep est, he Pres. s/co, evda), nlma, 
fulls, you two rejoice, they xalgo), xoqevco, §Unw, yo- 
two dance, we see, you think, plCa, iglyco. ' 

they contend. 

2. I was striking, thgu 
wast teaching, he ivas trust- 
itig, you two were saying, 
they two were commanding , 
we were suffering, you were 
learning, they were hoping. 

3. I icill scnd,.thou shalt 1st F. nipno), XaTgevw, cpal- 
servc, he will show, you two vto, ftaodevo), olxiw, Jxw, 
shall reign, we shall inhabit, xuxow. 

you icill come, they will injure. 

4. / changed, thou re- 
proachedst, he did, they two 
were silent, we confessed, 
they stayed. 



Imp. rviiTO), diddoxG), Tit- 
cm voi, Xiyco, xsXivcj, Ttaoxbi, 
ixavd-dvco, iXni^w. 



1st A. dfieiCa), oveidl£<», 
nqdoao), oiydto, o/ioXoyeco, 
fiivw. 



GREEK EXERCISES, 



5. I have written, thou Perf. ygdcpoj, adiasca, nlov- 
hast injured, he has enriched, ■*/£», svgtaxto, dgdio, vi- 
they two have found, we have xd&>. 

done, you have conquered. 

6. I had known, he had Plup. yiyvcaoxa, ntpTua, fci- 
sent, we had supped, they nvsu, (toyd-ia*. 

had assisted. 

7. I threw, he fled, you 2d A. /Sa'Mw, cpevya, Xafi- 
two received, we left, you 6uv(o> Ulna, dldco^i, tI- 
gave, they placed. -&^(ii. 

8. I shall sow, he will per- 2d F. anslgca, jtsl&ta, tiXsxg*, 
suade r you shall plait, they xxdva. 

will slay. 

Passive. 

9. lam struck, thou art Pres. naiw, tiItiXtj^i, xigrna, 
filled, they two are delighted, ngyw, xoXafr. 

we are kept off, they are 
punished. 

10. I was nourished, he Imp. xgicpa, pctard^a, Xslna, 



was carried, we were left, 
they were wounded. 

11. I have been persuaded, 
thou hast been proclaimed, 
he has been thrown, we have 
been smitten, they have been 
turned. 

12. Thou hadst been in- 
jured, he had been covered, 
they had been deprived. 

13. I shall be called, thou Pau. xaXiw, d-dma, nXyoow, 
shalt be buried, he shall be rdaaca. 

smitten,we shall be arranged. 



TlTgttiOXW. 

Perf. nsl&co, xriQVGoa, gl- 

71Tb), TrXrjGOOJ, TQ87KO. 



Plup. ddiTiSb), xaXvmta, ots- 

QStO. 



AGREEMENT OV A VERB WITH A NOMINATIVE. 6 

14. I was moved, he was 1st A. xtria, uiairto, nianu, 
polluted, ire were sent, they nfypoxa. 

were filled. 

15. Thou wilt be saved, 1st F. <jcJ>, vipow, &av- ^ 
he shall be exalted, we shall /ua>, pamlZoi. 

be admired, yoa shall be 
baptized. 

16. I was soU, lie was an- 2d A. oxiklu, ayysXkio, /51a- 
nounced, you were hurt, they titw, endow. 

tccre scattered. 

17. He shall be slain, you 2d F. acpuno), deoa, xqv- 
shall be beaten, they will be nno. 

concealed- 

Middle. 

18. 1 receive, hebathts, you Pres. xo^l'^, Xova, <jpv- 
guard yourselves against, luaow, didaoxw. 
they cause to teach. 

19. Thou armed st thyself, Imp. o*U£a, uq X w, gnuya, 
he hfgan, we hastened, they -luaaw. 

set themselves in array. 

20. J have appeared, he Perf. cpalvxa, Xdnw, dioxw, 
has left, you have seen, they noaooo). 

It an done. 

21. Thou hadst heard, it Plup. uxovco, xi)xm, 7rao*w. 
left d, they had suffered. 

22. I hired, thou causedst 1st A. piodou, noiico, xa- 
to make t he covered himself ", Xvnioj, Tiruaaoi, ypucpoj. 
they two shook, they accused. 

2'3. / will arm myself, he 1st F. dupr-aou, xivio), a- 
will move, they will depart. nuMuaab). 



4 GREEK EXERCISES. 

24. I found, he drew to 2d A. evglaxa, ngoodyco, 
himself, we sold, they turned. txTiodldoifii,, jginm. 

25. I shall obey, they will 2d F. nel&a, nlnna. 
fall 

Active. 

26. Physicians cut, two 3 Iong6g Tspva, liwv cpvXdooa), 
lions guard, horses ran, two Xnnog &i(o im P, -frtganav xo- 
servants took care of, heralds ^8oo imp , xr\gv$ vipojf a . 
distributed. 

Passive. 

27. TVine is found, men Oivog svgloxa, dvrig naraXsl- 
were left behind, breastplates na> im P, #w'oa| nogl^oi^. 
were provided. 

Middle. 

28. Robbers approach, en- Ayaxrig TigoaigxofiaL, noXifiiog 
emies appeared, let Phoenix (palvoi im P, d>otV/| r\y so- 
lead. [icu fa . 

II. An adjective agrees with a substantive in 
gender, number, and case. Grammar, Rule II. 

29. Long walls. Maxgbg TE~L%og. 

30. A double trench. AmXoog rdygog. 

31. Brazen walls. XccXxsog To7%og. 

32. Swift-footed dogs. Hod(axi]g xvctv. 

33. Golden crowns. Xgvasog OTecpavog*. 

34. Wooden towers. nvgyog ZvXivog. 

35. Of sweet water. c Hdvg vdwgS. 

36. A golden-horned stag. Xgvooxegag I'XoKpog*. 

37. Two brazen-footed XctXxonovg Xnnog. 
horses. 



AGREEMENT OF AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 5 

88. A more prudent sister. HwcpQtav ddzXcprj. 

39. To smaller ships. Mixgog nXolov d . 

40. A most miserable wo- "A&Xiog yvvrj. 
man. 

41. Amost famous crown. KXtivog axicpavog a . 

42. Wise men confute. 2oybg avyg l%z\iyx<n. 

43. Swift horses came. 'Slnvg Xnnog l'^o / uat A -* a . 

44. Black ships followed. MiXtxg vai/g s7to[i<u im P. 

45. Six well-booted com~ "££ evxvyuig frcugog o&Xv(o li ' sa . 
panions perished. 

46. Places mountainous XmqIov oguvog ndl dva6arog. 
and difficult of access. 

47. Here are found many 'EvTav&a evq'hjxo) noXvg xXlvrj. 
beds. 

48. Many other cultivat- HoXvg aXXog fjuegog tnprjXog 
ed lofty trees. divdgov. 



a. This rule applies to the article, adjective, adjec- 
tive-pronoun, and participle. 

49. Burning torches. Ai'&w M - PA dais. 

50. The second seal. c O dsmsgog acpgaylg. 

51. This land has been "0§s 6 yr\ om£<o. 

saved. 

52. The flying chariots. 

53. Of the great harbour. 

54. The written laws. 

55. All the tribes shall 
mourn. 



O cpevyoo**- agfia. 
'0 uiyag fofrijp** 
c O ygd(p(o rA ' pT vopog* . 
ling 6 (f>vXr\ xomoo* . 



56. These good hopes. 

57. My servants made. 



Gwtog 6 aya&og iXnls *. 
'0 ifibg oixhrjg fqyd^o^a^. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



58. The Indians having '0 'ivdog uoiQxofiaf'**"** Ae- 



entered said 



yet 



fa 



59. These horsemen slay. Omog o Imzevg omoxxuvw. 

60. Our villages are laid e O ftfihsgog xcofi^ noQ&ia. 
waste. 

61. All the children are Ilag 6 nalg natdsva). 
educated. 

62. The true worshippers c O aXrj&Lvog ngooxvvrjTrjg 
shall worship. ngooxvvia). 



III. Verbs of a transitive signification govern 
the accusative. Grammar, Bute XXL 

63. They open the gates. ^Avolyca o nvXr\. Xen. 

64. Then they water the Trjvixavia agdta 6 x^nog- He- 
gardens. rodot. 

65. Having come they "£^o i u<u A,PA - sa S^dnTto^P 6 
buried the Cadusians. Kadovotog. Xen. 

66. Seest thou these great BXina omog 6 psyag oixodofiq; 
buildings ? N. Test. 

67. And suddenly the sol- Kal i^anlvrjg 6 orgaTKorrjg <jps- 
diers bring stones. gco Xld-og. Xen. 

68. Perhaps thou hast seen "iawg ogdco 6 dvr\g fidxo(iaL TA . 
the men fighting. Plato. 

69. I hate the Lacedcemo~ *Eyw (jnoia o Aansdai^ioviog 
nians exceedingly. oyodga. Aristoph. 

70. I honor the Father, Tiy.d(a 6 Ilarrjg, teal oh <m/ua- 
and you dishonor me. £w iyco. N. Test. 

71. And you shall know Kal yLyvojoxa* 6 aXy&aa, 
the truth, and the truth shall xal o dXij&sia iXev&egom 
free you. av. N. Test. 



ADJECTIVES USED WITHOUT SUBSTANTIVES. 



72. Therefore a small Ovxovv ouixgbg gr({ia v.axa- 
word extinguishes all such aftivvv^i nag 6 roiovtog 
pleasures. tfiovrj. Plato. 

73. The prisoners seize e aixftdXatog xuTaXrx^6dvco 
the citadel, and the city 6 axgonoXig, nal 6 noXig 



revolts. 



UCplOT7][lL 



Xen. 



IV. Adjectives, adjective-pronouns, and parti- 
ciples, may be used without substantives, the 
ones irom which they take their gender, num- 
ber, and case, being understood. Grammar, 
Rule II, Obs. 9. 



74. Certain persons praise 
him. 

75. Then the just shall 
shine forth. 

76. That which is true 
never is confuted. 

77. He icho struck had 
three excuses. 

78. These things I have 
seen, and those things I 
have heard. 

79. I slew her who brought 
forth, I will not deny. 

80. The Greeks saw the 
cavalry still assembled to- 
gether. 

81. The royal laws not 
only punish those icho injure, 
but also they benefit the just. 



Tig 6/xeo/WsW aviog. Plato. 

Tots 6 dlxmog p exXd/uTtco. 
N. Test. 

c O uXr]xrrig ne ovdenoTt OJyx<a. 
Plato. 

'0 7tazu(jou)* A, f a I'/to im P rgng 
ngocpnaig- Demosth. 

Oving ■&Eao^.UL v , xal exuvog 
uxovco™ . Plato. 

KTUV0}f a 6 TtXTW PA, * a , OVX 

agvioftm. ^Eschyl. 
'0 "EXXi t v ild(o* a 6 Inmxog 06 
rri ovrlaT7]/ui A ' ?A P. Xen. 

O ftaoiliy.bg roftog ov fiovov 
£r)fJi6o) 6 «<5tx£W rA , aXXd y.al 
axptXtco 6 dly.uiog p . Xen. 



8 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



82. The blind see, the 
lame walk, the leprous are 
cleansed, the deaf hear, the 
dead are raised. 



Tvcplbg avaSUnoo, xwlbg ft(Qi~ 
naxita, lengbg xa&ctpl£<o, 
xcocpbg axovco, vexqbg eyelqw* 
N. Test. 



V. The prepositions dvil, and, §x, ngo, govern 
the genitive ; Iv, avv, the dative ; and sis, the 
accusative. Grammar, Rule XL VIII. 



83. Hear then a dream 
for a dream* 

84. They chose the Lace- 
daemonians before the Messe- 
nians. 

85. The flesh they eat, 
the fat they melt, and use 
instead of oil. 

86. This river flows, not 
from the south, but from the 
rising sun. 

87. After the first sleep 
he marched. 

88. Few of many came 
safe into the city. 

89. For this enterprise he 
was praised at Sparta. 

90. With these flowers I 
crowned thee. 

91. He throws the stone 
out of his hand. 

92. They labor/row night 
to night. 



Axovoj* drj ovocq avxl oveiqag 
(g. -axog). Plato. 

Algia M - sa Aaxedotifioviog civil 
Meaoyviog. Xen. 

c O xgeag ea&ico, 6 ds Xlnog 
xrjxw, xaX avxl eXaiov xqo\o~ 
fiai. Strabo. 

Ovxog o noxocpbg qew, ovx aub 
fiEorjiJ.6glc(, aXXa unb avL>- 
0#w PA i\liog. Arrian. 

Ano o Ttgwiog vnvog %(OQiia im P. 
Thucyd. 

'OXlyog unb noXvg ow£a) F f a elg 
b nohg. Thucyd. 

Anb ovxog b ToXprjfia enoti- 
t>£M p S a iv 2naQxi]. Thucyd. 

Ano ovxog b av&og oxsq)av6uJ a 
ov. Longus. 

Plnxa o Xl&og ex b #s/o. 
Polyb. 

Hovem* ex vv!; elg vv£. ^Es- 
chin. Socr. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 9 

93 They make also wine Boiim U *& olrog $* b x*4*6g. 

of the fruit Theophrast. ^ ^ 

. 94. After dinner he led ^ agtorov ngoayo^ o <rt§«- 

forward the army. «V* Xen " 

95. He fainted /rom the MmoyvfieP* i* 6 nagadotog 

. i • yaod. Chariton. 

unexpected joy /°V W - 

96 By war peace is *E* notefiog dg^v M aloa - 
strengthened. Thucyd. 

97 A sea-fiaht takes place Nav(ia.yja ylyvoptu ngo o Bv~ 
before Byzantium. *""* ^^ 

98 We came before noon 'EgzcpaL*-** *Q° P«"^V« 
ioApsarus. dg "Ayagog. Aman.^ 

99. He prefers beauty i7oo worn} ngoTi^aoi v.uliog. 
before virtue. Plat0 ' 

100. He dies /or Sparta. Ilgb o Sn&Qtn ano&vfaxa. 

Herodot. 

101. There is also in the Elul xal tv IlSvrog Efcuvog 
Pontes Euxinus a place so X aglov ohm *aUe>" . 
called. - Arrian ' 

102 Having run away ndUv ixu^sp dMou- 

again from thence, he lived axco «~ h Boionog fc**- 

among the Boeotians. rao^ia^. Isocr. 

103. Before all the Athc- 3 £v anag U&rp>aiog ttdiyyu rJa . 

rwans wast thou convicted. iEschin. 

104 During the plague 3 £v o loiubg b nuig unoGul- 

he lost his children. W. iElian. 

105. To send heavy-arm- 'JtittforiXXfa onlhrig h b 2v**- 
ed soldiers into Sicily. Utt. Thucyd. 

106. Epaminondas was 'EnafUivMag mQtiau^ b 
wounded at Mantinea. JMavxirda. iEliail. 



10 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



107. Jesus was led by the 
spirit into the wilderness. 

103. He returned to Rome 
with the guards. 

109. You conquered with 
the assistance of the gods. 

110. We will be on the 
side of those who are injured. 

111. They threw them- 
selves into the river. 

112. He walled in Chalce- 
don from sea to sea. 

113. Let us delay the 
marriage till autumn. 

114. Look towards the 
citadel. 

115. They march again 
against Corinth. 

116. Philip was found in 
Azot'us. 

117. Celebrated among 
the other Greeks. 

118. Smerdis was sitting 
on the royal throne. 

119. From Athens twenty 
ships came for the guard. 

120. To be praised on 
account of beauty. 



'fqaovg ccyw m P ev o nvsvfia 
slg 6 tQTjjxog. N. Test. 

3 E7iavigxoy.ca k ' aa eg 6 c Pwp7 

avv o doQVcpogog. Hero- 
dian. 

Nixaio im P avv o &sog. Xen. 

2vv 6 adiasoj T ' FA ' pr slfil. Xen. 



(log. Polyb. 
AttotsixI^co 1 ™? 6 XaXxrjduv 
anb ■fralaxTtt slg &aXaTia. 
Xen. 

Ava6(xXX(o i/l - sv 'P r 6 ydfiog slg 
o fisTOTicagor. Longus. 

A7io6Xeno}f a - % slg o axgono- 
Xig. Lucian. 

JZiqcctsvco naXuv slg 6 Kogiv- 
&og. Xen. 

(frlXinnog ds svglaxat^ 1 slg 
"AfrTog. N. Test. 

EXXoyipog slg 6 ccXXog "EXXtjV. 
Plato. 

Z/isgdig %^' imp slg 6 PccgIXsl- 
og &govog. Herodot. 

Ex 6 A&ijvcu sXxooi vavg 
acpixvsoy.v.i sa eg o cpvXax^. 
Thucyd. 

'Etkxlvsco slg 6 xaXXog. Lu 
cian. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 11 

VI. The prepositions did, xazd, vnig, govern 
the genitive and accusative ; and dvd, the dative 
and accusative. Grammar, Rule XLIX. 

Genitive. 

121. He dammed up the "Anoxonvvwf* 6 gi(a tK noraiuog 
river flowing through the did 6 nohg. Xen. 

city. 

122. They sent ambassa- n£(into im P ng£o6vg dux Ttoaa- 
dors by means of Tissapher- (psgvrjg. Xen. 

nes. 

123. With all carefulness Aid nag dy.gl6ua £Uyx<d im P 6 
he scrutinized the words. ).6yog. Longus. 

124. They are troubled Tagdaow Sid nug 6 /Slog, 
during their whole life. Cebes. 

125. This thing I pro- Ovrog fiuvrevofxai xax avxog. 
phesy concerning him. Plato. 

12G. No one will bring Ovdug y.ax iya> sladyco dixy. 

an action against me. Aristoph. 

127. By night he slept Kvxtwo y.uxd xXlrrj ov v.oi- 
not upon a bed. fxdo) M - im P. Chariton. 

128. The island disap- c o vrjaog uyctviQw*™? y.uxd 
peared under the sea. 6 ddlaooa. Herodot. 

129. They leap from the "jXkoftm y.uxd o ntxgu. Xen. 
rock. 

130. He wandered through 'Ado/im** ntna 6 %(ogu. Po- 
the country. ]yb. 

131. I swore by the my r- 'tyrvoto yard 6 ftvgxog. 
tie trees. Longus. 

132. Above the gardens 'Tmg 6 xfaoq agog xtliua. 
mountain. Herodot. 

133. He laid weak tim- fcmteW* $vlor dodtvrjg vnig 
bers over the trench. g T d(pgog. Herodot. 



12 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



134. Beyond the desert 
the Thyssagetse inhabit. 

135. The Thracians quar- 
rel among themselves for the 
fragments of the ships. 

136. He related concern- 
ing Homer all the truth. 



c Ttteq o EQijfiog Ovaoayixat 
olxico. Herodot. 

c O Oga$ vnig 6 vavdyiov iv 
ov dia[uxxo(j.ai. Arrian. 

'AqpqyeofMu im P vnig "Ofxrjgog 
nag 6 aX^Eia. . Herodot. 
Vit. Horn. 



Accusative. 



137. On account of thee 
I came, on account of thee 
I kill the poor black birds. 

138. By means of us you 
possess this country. 

139. By those who fight 
well battles are decided. 

140. This Theramenes 
here has been condemned 
according to law. 

141. Egypt revolted dur- 
ing that time. 

142. You were admired 
through Greece. 

M3. He fed cattle in 
these places. 

144. He made an irrup- 
tion through Achaia into 
Elea near Larissa. 

145. Cephallenia lies op- 
posite to Acharnania. 



Ata ov sgxofjiat A ' 8a , dice ov 
dnoXXvoo 6 a&Xiog KOipuxog. 
Longus. 

At 3 sya I'xo) ods 6 x®Q a ' Xen. 

A La 6 sv [idxo}iai,* x o [idxn 

xglvco. Xen. 
OrjgaiAEvrjg ovxool xaxaxglva 

xaxa, vopog. Xen. 

Al'yvnxog dcplox7][Ai Ampl xax 
inuvog 6 xgovog. Isocr. 

Oav^d^(o m P aara 6 c £XXdg. 
Thucyd. 

Ni[i(o irnp xTrjvogf xaxd ovxog 
6 xwgloV' Herodot. 

Ejx6dXXco sa dta 6 Axd'ia s ig 
6 "llXsia xaxa Aagiaaa. 
Xen. 

Kst^av ds KsyaXXrjvla xccxu 
3 Axotgvavla. Thucyd. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 



13 



14G. Having run up to the Arar^tx™**"* 0, xaxd o^Axqo^ 
citadel of Corinth, they re- xogw&og, 'Agyslog ano- 



xQov(a*- fa . Xen. 
8s aXXog f]vloxog ixxXl- 



(pEt/Cd 



pulsed the Argives. 

147. The other charioteers 
turned aside after the flying 
chariots. 

148. They slew above a A7ioxxdvixi fa vney -/LXiol, xal 
thousand, and the others with 6 Xoincg ^ayUTrwg unoxo)- 



vco^ a xara 6 
ugfja. Xen.- 



difficulty retired. 

149. Over his left shoul- 
der passed the point. 

150. The report spread 
through the other armies. 



Qso) fa . Thucyd. 
'Ttisq bifiog agiOTtqbg iq%o-~ 

fiat, A - sa axcoxrj. Horn. 
cprjixr] Smxtqsxio sa ava 6 Xoi- 

nog oTQuronsdov. Herodian. 



151. Unjustly do you pros- Adlxwg eviv^sco ava, c £XXdg. 
per in Greece. Eurip. 

152. I collected much JloXvg <$' dyuQio^ a XQW a <*»<* 
riches among the Egyptian Alyvmioq avriq. Horn. 
men. 

VII. The prepositions d[i<pl 9 inl, (xstcI, nagd, 
mot, ttqos, V7i6, govern the genitive, dative, and 
accusative. Grammar ', Rule L. 

Genitive. 

153. Thou knowest all nag il'du** ufiyl ipog ydpog. 
things concerning my nup- Eurip. 

tials. 

154. The Carduchians c O di KaQSov^og tivq xalo) im P 
kindled fires upon the moun- (m 6 ooog. Xen. 

tains. 

155. And they have power Kal e*ovola %w inl 6 vtiwo. 
over the waters. N. Test. 

2 



14 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



156. He passed over then 
immediately in a ship from 
Thyrea to Cyllene. 

157. To mourn by the 
■cool Acheron. 

158. He accused before 
the king. 

159. And they themselves 
having embarked sailed to- 
wards Chios. 

160. And the foot soldiers 
have battle-axes, as in the 
time of Cyrus. 

161. Thou changedst not 
thy nature with thy fortune. 

162. These shall fight 
against the lamb, and the 
lamb shall overcome them. 

163. We received this 
government from the Medes. 

164. This thing is granted 
both by thee and by me. 

165. Concerning my gait 
I will speak with boldness. 

166. There come from 
Sinope ambassadors, fearing 
for the city and for the 
country. 

167. I honored Patroclus 
above all my companions. 

168. From him icho brought 
he heard such reproaches. 



JJsgaioca r, f a tots evdvg inl 
nXdlov ix 6 Ovgia ig Kvl- 
\r{vi]. Thucyd. 

Mvgopai inl ipvxQog A/iguv. 
Theocr. 

KaT7iyogect)f a inl 6 fiaadsvg. 
Diod. Sic. 

Kal avrbg ia6alr(a FA - sa nXico imp 
inl Xlog. Herodot. 

Kal 6 ne£bg l%(o adyagig, 
uunsg inl Kvgog. Xen. 

Ovx aiiu6(x)f a fiixa 6 TV%rj o 
cpvoLQ. Isocr. 

OvTog (isid 6 agvlov noXejidoj, 
xal o agvlov vixdco avrog. 
N. Test. 

Uagalay.6dvc0 sa 6 ^ye^ovla 
ode nagd Mrjdog. Herodot. 

Ovrog xal nagd ov xal nag' 
iya 6{j.oXoyico. Plato. 

Hegl 6 ipbg fiddic^a sl'gco fi£ T d 
naggrjala. Demosth. 

"jEgxofiav in 2iv<anr\ ngia6vg, 
Cpo6s(x> M,PA nsgl 6 noXig xal 
nsgl o xwQ a ' Xen. 

ndrgoxXog iyw nsgl nag xlco mp 

eraTgog. Horn. 
Ugog 6 q>igo) PA tolooSs a- 
xovco imp xaxov. Eurip. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 15 

- 169. They are carried by "Ayw ngog Egivvvg did Tug- 

tlic Furies through Tartarus. tago;" . iEschin. Socr. 

170. By the gods, said I, Ilgb^ b xreog, cpr][xl sa £yh),nov 
where spendest thou . thy 8iutqL6o), xat rig M noiiw ; 
time, and what dost thou ? Xen. 

171. He made a truce for 2novd7]V noti(a M ^ a ngog 6ty- 
the advantage of the The- 6ouog fiuXXov, ij ngog eav- 
bans, more than for the ad- too. Xen. 

vantage of themselves. 

172. Near the standard Ugbg 6 orjfiilov 6 dxovnoTrjg 
let the darters be placed. jdooto e - 1M -P. Arrian. 

173. In the time ofPsam- 3 Enl ^un^xixog cpvXaxr] xa- 
metichus guards were sta- ■&loTrjfxi, A - sa ngog Ai&loy. 
tioned against the jEthio- Herodot. 

pians. 

174. They quickly assem- Oowg ovvuyelg(a*-f a vno oxie- 
bled under a shady plane- gog nXaxdvioxog. Theocr. 
tree. 

175. But now being asked Nvv de iguxdu vno ov igv- 
by thee he blushes. -Ogidoj. Plato. 

17G. The others through c O aXXog vno 6 cp&ovog ov oir- 

envy were not silent. yaw im P. Xen. 

177. Sing Bacchus with MiXnw P o diovvoog (tagv- 
the deep-toned timbrels. 6gofiog vno xv^navov. Eu- 

rip. 

Dative. 

178. About her fair neck "Og/xog d* a^qp' unuXbg dsigt] 
were very beautiful chains. nigixaXXr t g dfil imp . Horn. 

179. The suitors nad a 'o fivr t oxr]g i'xa) imp igig d/u<pl 
contest about wnuic. [tovoixrj. Herodot. 

180. To suffer hardships Toioode u^cpl yvvr\ uXyog nd- 
for such a woman. o%(o. Horn. 



16 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



181. He lay upon the shore 
heavily groaning among ma- 
ny Myrmidons. 

182. They immediately 
send the heavy-armed men 
in afeiv ships. 

183. These Phoenicians 
formerly inhabited near the 
Red sea. 

184. Immediately against 
Tydides he bent the crooked 
bows. 

185. The women came 
from the fountain : after 
them came the swineherd. 

186. He is renowned for 
wisdom among all the Greeks. 

187. The senate will be 
in the power of those icho 
speak. 

188. I stand among the 
foremost in the battle. 

189. Now I sit in your 
assembly, imploring. 

190. Afterwards they took 
supper by the swift black 
ship. 

191. Here they sewed for 
hire with the king. 

192. They had about their 
bodies mean garments. 



"Enl &lv xslfiai imp $ocgvoxsvd- 
%(x> noXvg (isxd Mvopidav. 
Horn. 

c O onXixi\g ini i>avg oXlyog 
sv&vg ni[iTi(o. Thucyd. 

Ovxog ds o 0oivi^ xonaXaiov 
oixso)f a inl 6 3 £gv&Qog &d- 
Xaoaa. Herodot. 

Aiipv. inl Tvdsldr]g xixal- 
V(0 M.imp xapjivlog xo^ov. 
Horn. 

e O ds yvvr\ BQ%o}iaL A - sa dno 
%gy\vr\ ' snl ds ov ig/oficci A,sa 
av6uT7]g. Horn. 

Evdoxiixia A snl oocplct iv nag 
o "EXXyv. Plato. 

*Enl o Xsya ri - 6 fiovXsvxrjgiov 
tlpL Demosth. 

Msxd ngwxog P loxtj^ii M dvd 
lid%r\ a . Horn 

Nvv ds (xsd-' vpixsgog dyogd 
rj[xcu, Xloaofiou. Horn. 

Aognog snutf algico M,sa -&oog 
nagd vavg fisXag. Horn. 

3 Evxav&a ds ^xsvco im P snl 
(iio&og nagd 6 Saadsvg. 
Herodot. 

"EX(o tm P nsgl 6 owficc eo&7}$ 
Xixog. Herodian. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 



17 



193. The Corinthians, 
fearing for the place, send 
heavy-armed men. 

194. To slay the Argives 
at the ships, confounded by 
the s)noke. 

195. They encamped near 
Olyntlms in the Isthmus. 

196. He never had a shield 
in his left hand. 

197. Besides physiology, 
they also cultivate moral phi- 
losophy. 

198. They found an ever- 
flowing fountain under a 
rock. 

199. Two men with their 
teeth laid hold of the ground, 
subdued by my spear. 

200. He danced about the 
altars to flutes. 



c O Koulv&iog, dsldca M - PA * nsgl 
6 ^w^/ov, nifxnio bnXlrrjg. 
Thucyd. 

KtsIvoj *Agyuog naga vavg, 
aiv£o) r -* A -'P r nsgl nanvog. 
Horn. 

2?TgaT07ied£vo{iai' imp ngbg *'0- 
Xvv&og iv 6 la & {tog. Thu- 
cyd. 

Ovnois uomg I'xoj sa ngbg 

Xuibg x^Q' Eurip 
JUgbg 6 cpvoioXoyla, xal 6 

r}&ix6g cpiXooocpla aoxew. 

Strabo. 

Evgloy.M sa asvvaog xgrjvi] vnb 
niiqru Theocr 

Avo epeag odu$ vdgico sa ovdag, 
ffibg vnb dogv <5« t uaw p-PA,8a . 
Horn. 

JJsgl b fi(x){ibg xogeva im P vnb 
avXog. Herodian. 



Accusative. 

201. Around thee others 9 Ap<pl de ov uXXog xrslvm 1 **, 
were slain, fighting for thee. ^ugvauai nsgl ov s. Horn. 

202. The Cadusians came c O Kadovaiog ow£ia vAm P ngbg 
safe to the camp about even- b oxgaiomdov afupl SeIXt]. 



in -. 


Xen. 


203. Hermione, having 
come to the sepulchre, and 
standing upon the mound, 
say these things. 

2* 


'jCguiovif, I'gxoftai *•**"'* u(xq>l 
6 rdcpog, xal 'lorrjiui A -' A -* a 
in} xMpa*, X£y<»f a odt. 
Eurip. 



18 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



204. He mounted Crcesus 
upon the pile, bound in fet- 
ters. 

205. And over the merce- 
nary force he sets Adeas. 

206. He invited this com- 
pany to supper with their 
captain. 

207. The river flows to- 
wards the west through great 
Armenia. 

208. He marched against 
the Egyptians ; he had 
about him thirty thousand 
men. 

209. They besieged Barce 
for nine months. 

210. They have sent also 
ambassadors into Peloponne- 
sus after another army. 

211. They departed out of 
Sicily after the treaty. 

212. The princess threw 
the ball to her maid. 

213. The goddess has a 
cymbal in her hands. 

214. I" came to the house 
by day with the youth. 

215. Having offered a liba- 
tion, immediately he brought 
the youths to Chirisophus ; 
and they relate these things. 



jtva6i6(i£a)f a inl 6 nvga 6 
Kgolvog, iv nidrj 5s(0 T ' VA P . 
Herodot. 

Kal inl 6 &viv.bg ne aa&loxrifiv 

Adsag. Xen. 
Kcde(o-f a ovxog 6 jd^ig inl 6 

detnvov avv 6 Tti&agzog. 

Xen. 

O noxa^og Qsoi inl dvaig dia 
o itiyag Aginvia g « Strabo. 

3 £X<xvv(o %m P inl 6 Alyvnxiog ' 
e%(0 %m P de nsgl kavxov avrjg 
xgiapvgioi. Herodot. 

HoXiogxsw tm P 6 Bugxtj inl 
firjv ivvia. Herodot. 

Uepnoo ds xal ig HsXonovvijaog 
ngso6vg in cillog oxgaxid* 
Thueyd. 

3 AnsQX0(ieci, A - sa in 2ixslia fisxa 
6 gvfiSaoi?. Thueyd. 

2cpaiga glnxto^ a [isxa afiyi- 
noXog fiocolkeux. Horn.. 

O &s6g xv^i6akov fisxa %eiq 
s'xeo. Arrian. 

>, EQXOficu A ' sa i7tl 6 oixla fistf 
rjfiigcc fiETct 6 fisigdxwv° . 
Lysias. 

2nivd(o VA -f a ds, sv&vg ayto im P 
6 vsaviaxog nagd 6 Xeigl- 
ooq>og ' xal dirjyiofiai oviog. 
Xen. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 



19 



• 216. He saw two ships 
standing near the lake. 

217. Almost during all 
the year they celebrate 
feasts. 

218. Not only against 
the decrees did he accuse us, 
but also against the laws. 

219. And these things he 
has suffered from Midias by 
reason of his poverty. 

220. And they were wal- 
lowing in the streets, and 
about all the fountains. 

221. Having stayed there 
about sixteen days, he re- 
tired again to Thespiae. 

222. They have practised 
piety towards the gods. 

223. Having made a 
league with the barbarians, 
he hastened to his mother. 

224. Having passed over, 
they travelled towards the 
rising sun. 

225. He had shown bra- 
very in the battles against 
the enemies. 

226. On account of the 
letters they suspected him. 

227. The soldiers pre- 
pared themselves for the 
march. 



£ld(o sa dim nXoiov t ioTT}[xi A -' TA,p 
Tiaou 6 Xifivrj. N. Test. 

J?Xedbv netqet nug 6 inavibg 
eogrd^b). Herodian. 

Ov f^orov naqu o xpr t q)ia^a 
dia6d).Xo) im P tya, aXXu xal 
nctQa 6 rofxog. Demosth. 

Kut oi'iog 7iao%oi u vnb Mei- 
dlug s nagd 6 nevlcc. De- 
mosth. 

Kul ip 6 bdbg xaXiv8i(a li ' imp ) 
xai ntgl o xgr t vv omag. 
Thucyd. 

Miv(a* M "f a ixtt mgl ixxaldsxa 
r\fiiga, uttozcoqeq) f a ndXiv 
slg 0(.(j7iial. Xen. 

*Aaxi(a sias6sia ntgl 6 xrtog. 
Isocr. 

27iivdG)*-* A S a ngbg 6 pdg6a~ 
qog, ngbg 6 lxr,rrjo intl- 
yco M - im P. Herodian. 

Aiu6ulrw aa , bdotnogita imp 
ngbg TjXiog dvloxw. He- 
rodot. 

Avdgila iv o fid^r] ngbg o no- 
Xifxiog emSsixvva)*-? 1 . Hero- 
dian. 

IJgog 6 (moxoXii vnonnvoi xmp 
aviog. Thucyd. 

e OTgujibjTvg naqctoxiva- 
£w "MP ngbg b t$odog. 
Herodian. 



30 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



228. These ants make a Ovxog o f*vgpr)$ noiia™ oV~ 
habitation under ground. xyoig vnb yrj. Herodot. 

229. About this time the c Tno ovxog b xgovog b drjuoxga- 
democracy was subverted. xla, xaxcdva*-™?. Thucyd. 

a. c stg is often used for ngbg or tig. Grammar, 
Rule £., Obs. 1. 



230. During the peace 
we sent to you concerning 
our revolt. 

231. He himself with the 
ten men undertakes the 
voyage to Tissaphernes. 



°Ev 6 ug^vr\ nifi7T(o f a ag av 
nsgl dnoaxaoig s . Thucyd. 



Avxbg ^«t« 6 dixa avfjg* 
6 nloog ag -o Tioaacpigvrig 
tzolsg) M . Thucyd. 



b. Prepositions are often understood. 
Rule L., Obs. 5. 



Grammar, 



232. Agamemnon, I be- 
seech thee by these knees. 

233. Now therefore why 
neither payedst thou the 
tribute 1 

234. The cities they burn- 
ed with their temples. 

235. And they sailed im- 
mediately with jive . and 
twenty ships, and afterwards 
with another fleet. 

236. During this the A- 
thenians having arrived, and 
having marched immediate- 
ly with all the army, take 
Thyrea. 



Ayapifivwv 7 , Ixsxsiho av (ngbg) 

ods yovv s . Eurip. 
Nvv ovv (did) rig a,ne ovxs 6 

daofibg dndyco sa . Xen. 

c O nolig i(X7il7TQr t fiL im P (ovv) 
avtbg d,p o Isgov. Herodot. 

Kal nlmf* iv&vg (ovv) nzvxs 
xal tl'xoot vavg, xal voxsgov 
(ovv) I'xsgog oxolog. Thu- 
cyd. 

'Ev ovxog 6 3 A&7)v.cuog xaxi- 
X(o rA - sa , xccl X(aQS(o TA f a sv&vg 
(ovv) nag 6 oxgaxid, algeoo 
6 Ovgea. Thucyd. 



CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 



21 



VIII. Adverbs of place, time, cause, quanti- 
ty, concealment, separation, exception, exclama- 
tion, and adverbial nouns, govern the genitive. 
Grammar, Rule XLIV. 



237. You lament stand- 
ing near the tomb. 

238. The Persians en- 
camped near the Egyptians. 

239. Here at the extrem- 
ity we saw a cave near the 
sea. 

240. They pour the pitch 
into a pit dug near the lake. 

241. The Strymon is not 
far from the Hellespont. 

242. Thou diedst at Troy 
far from Argos, and about 
thee others were slain. 

243. He perished far 
from his native land, among 

an unknown people. 

244. Standing at a dis- 
tance from the pile, he 
sheared off his yellow hair. 

245. Zacynthus lies over 
against Elis. 

246. Thence he was car- 
ried straight towards Gy- 
theum. 



2v 8s &QT]vi(o iyyvg Icrz^— 
^ t A.PA.i> Tc jg, 0ff> ^Eschyl. 

'O Jlsgorjg l£(o M ' im P nsXag 6 
Alyvnnog. Herodot. 

"Ev&a 8° in iax«rla d oniog 
ti'do) sa ay%i &<xXuooa. 
Horn. 

D Eo%to) 5s 6 nlaaa ig Xdxxog 
6qvgog) p -* a ' p ayxov 6 Ujxvr]. 
Herodot. 

'0 J?TQV[/(OV elfu OV TIQOGW 

6 *Elti\anovTog. Herodot. 
Ovr l ox(o sa (v Tqola Ixug^Aqyog, 
uficpl de oil* uXXog xthvu 1 ™?. 
Horn. 

3 0XXv(a w,sa T7]Xo&i naxga, aX- 
Xoyvonog tvl drj^og. Horn. 

"lOTrjUl Vi " Sa (X7IUVIV&8 TCVQUf 

£av&6g anoxtlQ0) ¥ ^ a X a ^ T7 l- 
Horn. 

Zuxvv&og xu^lul avTiniqag 

"l/Xig. Thucyd. 
'Exii&ev uv(tyu} T f a tv&v /V- 

■frtiov. Xen. 



22 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



247. Straight to the 
deep trench they drove the 
Greeks. 

248. Alexander having 
marched from these parts, 
penetrated as far as the 
Ganges. 

249. They see horsemen 
beyond the river completely 
armed, and footmen upon 
the banks drawn up above 
the horsemen. 

250. To tie the horse 
above his head. 

251. I saw thee under 
the fig-tree. 

252. Within the yard he 
made twelve swine-cotes 
near one another. 

253. He stood without 
the tent, and presently he 
beheld a shameful affair. 

254. He went into the 
town with Oleander. 

255. They drew him out 
of the temple ; and forthwith 
the doors were shut. 

256. He went sometimes 
before Hector, sometimes 
behind. 

257. About dark . he 
comes to a village, and at 



'l&vg Tcccpgog (ja&vg (o&i(o^ a 
"Analog. Horn. 

AXs$avdgog o^acu p - PA ^ a urtb 
6 pegog omog uxgi 6 Tayyr\g 
disQxofiv.L A - sa . Arrian. 

Ogam Inntvg nsgav 6 noxa^bg 
£|07rA/^w p - PA '-P, 7is£og <5' inl 
6 oxd"t] d nagaxaoo(o p - FA - p 
avco 6 LTiTtEvg. Xen. 

JsGfisva) 6 Xnnog avw&ev o 
xeycdrj. Xen. 

JEl'dca sa ov VTioyMTCo 6 ovxij. 
N. Test. 

"jEvroo&ev d J avXrj ovcptbg dvo- 
xaldsxa noiico im P nXrjolov 
aXXi'iXwv. Horn. 

"ioTrifii sa <5' imbg xXioia, rc^ct 
$ £iasld(o sa e'gyov aeutrjg. 
Horn. 

JEtaco 6 xuxog cc7isiui M -P l avv 

KXsavdgog. Xen. 
°JEXy.a) sa avrbg l'£w o hgoV not 

tv&swg y.Xtl(of a 6 &vga. 

N. Test. 

0>oiT«a) im P cxXXots [iev ngoo&sv 
ExTtog, hXXote omo&sv. 
Hom. 
A^icpl xvicpctg* ngbg xtof/y* 



CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 



23 






the fountain before the wall 
he finds women from the 
village carrying water. 

258. Behind the foot he 
placed the whole cavalry. 

259. On both sides of 
the way the Lacedaemonians 
stood. 

260. Mesopotamia lies be- 
tween the Euphrates and the 
Tigris. 

261. He added also iron 
scythes about two cubits 
long to the axle-trees on 
each side of the tohcels. 

262. Within three months 
he recovered all Macedonia. 

263. They slept until far 
in the day. 

264. They skirmished 
frequently until evening. 

265. This supper is pre- 
pared once a year. 

266. Thrice a day I re- 
volve to myself the things 
which have been said. 

267. They followed, not 
ordered by their command- 
ers, but for the sake of 
plunder. 

268. On account of the 
god I nourished thee. 



ex o v.M{n] yvri) ngog o xgr r 
r)} d y.vcTalayCuiO) t\u7Tgo- 
adtv 6 i'gi\ua. Xen. 

"Oniad-ev 6 ns'Qbg inLTaooco^ 
6 nag c innog f . Herodot. 

*A(xcpOTLQG)&tv 6 odbg o Aaxz- 
daifioviog 'ioii]ui sa . Xen. 

Mtaonoja^ila xeeftai usra^v 

o Ev(fQUTi]g xal o Tiyqiq* 

Strabo. 
flQooTid-r l [Ai-f a de xal d.gsnavov 

utdijgtog wg dlnrj^vg ngbg 

u u$(av* i'v&sv xal ivSiv o 

TQOXoq. Xen. 
JSvjog TQSig pirjv anag xaTtxw sa 

JWaxsdovla. Isocr. 
Ku&evdo} im P (iixgi noggco 6 

r^utga. Xen. 
*A>igo6oXr£oucu im P noXXaxig us- 

Xgig tanega. Xen. 
Ovtog b dslnvov nagaoxtva'C,ia 

ana% 6 iviavrog. Herodot. 
'J'glg 6 fj^igu avaxvxXooi 7ig6g 

f'iiuvtov* 6 tgta) F ' F *' p . Lu- 

cian. 

u Enoucu xm P, ov Ta(Joo)*' VA -f a 
vrio o argmriyog b , akk 
ugnt/yi] t'vtXEV. Xen. 

'O \)tbq I'/.an ov rgicpb)^ 1 . 
Eurip. 



24 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



269. And now I have 
enough of afflictions. 

270. He sent me without 
the knowledge of the other 
Greeks. 

271. Without labor no- 
thing succeeds. 

272. I will bring women 
hither without arms. 

273. Without courage no 
art avails against dangers. 

274. I sent you without a 
purse. 

275. They slew all, ex- 
cept a few. 

276. Besides these, he 
maintains garrison-soldiers 
in the citadels. 

277. They dismissed 
these commanders, with 
the exception of Conon. 

278. O the insolence ! 
thou wilt not cease laugh- 
ing. 

279. Alas the rose-bed ! 
alas the violet-bed ! alas the 
hyacinths ! 

280. Innumerable men 
destroyedst thou on account 
of one woman. 

281. They were proclaim- 
ed before all the Grreeks. 



Kal vvv TiTjfici ctdrjv e/(o. 
Eurip. 

ni[X7i(af a (yd) Xd&ga 6 uXXog 
"EXXtjv. Herodot. 

Jlovog XMQiSt ovdslg ne EVTC%i(o. 
Soph. 

'jB/w yvvrj dsvgo onXov ayco 
dycc. Eurip. 

Avsv ivipvxla ovdslg xsyvy\ 
nqog 6 xlvdvvog a loxvca. 
Thucyd. 

'AttootsXXoj f a av aisg ftaXuv- 
tiov. N. Test. 

'AuoxtsIvw f a anag, (xTog oXl- 

yog. Xen. 
Xtoglg ds ovxog, (pvXa!; (v 6 

axQonoXig Tgsqxo. Xen. 

Oviog 6 OTQarrjyog nav(a^ a f 
ttXtjv Kovmv. Xen. 

*SL o v6gig ! ov tkxv(o h ys- 
/t«w FA . Lucian. 

G>sv 6 Qodowiu! cpsv o Icovidf 
q>sv o vdxiV'&og ! Longus 

Mxfglog anoXXva f a slg yvvr\ 
X^qw. Eurip. 

*Avayogsv(ji) %m P (vtaniov ornaq 
6 "EXXvp. vEschin. 



CONSTRUCTION OP ADVERBS. 25 

a. Many adverbs of exclamation are frequently joined 
with other cases besides the genitive, and some with 
other cases only. Grammar, Rule XLIV., Obs. 3. 

282. Ah me ! what wilt 0* iy'ta n * rig ne Xiyo, firjrr}g v ; 
thou say, mother ? Eurip. 

283. Ah me ! I am de- Ot £yw d , yzXaio, xegrofiico iyw 
rided, you taunt me in my £v xaxov. Eurip. 
afflictions. t 

284. Woe unto the world Oval 6 y.oopog* <xnb 6 axdv- 
because of offences. dakov. N. Test. 

285. O Socrates, said he, ~Sl 2(axgdrr\g y , (fr\^l sa y noi dy 
whither pray goest thou, and nogsva* , xal nod-sv ,- Plato, 
whence ? 

b. The genitive is often governed by tvuxcc, on account 
of, with respect to, understood. Grammar, Rule 
XLIV., Obs. 1. 

286. I esteem you blessed Maxagl'Qca av 6 xrrj[j.q.. 
on account of the possession. Plato. 

287. O daughter, I praise ~Sl &vydrr)g v , alviia av 6 ngo- 
theefor thy alacrity. &v[iLa. Eurip. 

288. I blame Clitus great- 3 Eya> KXurog [ih 6 v6gig nsya- 
ly for his arrogance, and I Xwarl ixi^q>o(xai, *AXi$avdgog 
pity Alexander on account of 8e 6 ovfxyogd oixnlgco. 
his calamity. Arrian. 

289. Ah me miserable on Ai iya> n ' f rdXaq oiangdoou*-*** 
account of the ruined army ! orgaxog. ^Eschyl. 

c. Adverbs of accompanying govern the dative. 
Grammar, Rule XLIV., Obs. 4. 1. 

290. They sailed with nXio) im P «//« 'laxialog ig Bv- 
Histiaus to Byzantium. £dvxiov. Herodot. 

3 



26 GREEK EXERCISES. 

291. At sun rising he sent "Apa ijXiog <xvoctsXXco px kt^S 
heralds about a truce. nipnwfi 1 nsgl anovd^-? . 

Xen. 

292. They sent also two °A7ioatsXXo}f a de xal diaxoaiot 
hundred heavy-armed men oTiXhrjg ofiov 6 Koglv&iog. 
with the Corinthians. Thucyd. 

d. Adverbs of swearing take the accusative. Gram- 
mar, Rule XLIV.j Obs. 4. 3. 

293. Thou art mad, O MeXayxoXato, w av&g(a7iog v , 
man, by heaven. vrj 6 ovgavog. Aristoph. 

294. But by the gods I \4XXa pet 6 &sog ovu syays av- 
will not pursue them. to? diaxa. Xen. 

295. Yes by Jupiter, said Nal pa Zevg, cpi]fu sa , w 7ra- 
he, O father, I remember. xtjg v , paw p 'P . Xen. 

IX. The modes required by particular ad- 
verbs are as follows, with the exception of the 
infinitive, for which see Rule XXIX., Obs. 3. 
Grammar, Rule XLIIL, Ohs. 4. 

a. c, E(og, oyqa, as long as, take the indicative or sub- 
junctive ; in the sense of until, the indicative, optative, 
or subjunctive. 

296. As long therefore as .. "Bag ovv slpl ev aaq>aXtjg, opv- 
you are in safety, beware. Xdoo(a M -f a . Demosth. 

297. He feasts as long as Aalvvpi^ ocpga i&eX(o SXJ . Op- 
he pleases. pian. 

298. After that they pro- "Ensixa ngoxugiu imv 81a Ke- 
ceeded through Cecropia, xgonlaZ, I'cog acpixveoficu sa 
until they came to Acharnse. eg 'Axagval. Thucyd. 



CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 



27 
6V?' 



299. But I obeyed not, AlV iya> ov tisL&oF 
until I should see him. avibg si'doj - sa . Horn. 

300. Wait until we drive nsoi^iivoi p sag 6 o%log diM- 
away the multitude, and then &ico M - 3V ^ a , ensna ds xatf 

Xen. 



at leisure we will converse 
together. 



i}OV/ia a ovyyiyvofiai. 



b. "Aym, fxeygi, I'ote, as long as, take the indicative ; 
in the sense of until, the indicative or subjunctive. 

301. As long as Pterelaus "jfrgi £dw im P nxsgilaog, ov 



lived, he was not able. 

302. Clearchus strove ve- 
hemently, until he prevailed. 

303. Pharnabazus waited 
at Chalcedon, until he came 
from Byzantium. 



8vva[iaL im P. Apollod. 
O 8s Kliagyog layvgojg y.axa- 

TSlV0i im P, SOTS 8Ltt7lOttOOGi U -f a . 

Xen. 

tI>aQvu6a'£og nsoifiivoi im ? ev 
Xalxrjduv, f^sygig i'gyo- 
fiou A - sv - sa in o Bv^dvnov. 
Xen. 



c. Mtoq>u, until, takes the indicative ; tlooxe, com- 
monly the subjunctive. 

304. We will repay gold, Xgvobg dnodldojfii, tlootce obg 
until thy heart is gladdened. xrjg ialva psu -/ a . Horn. 

d. i/olv, before, is joined with the indicative, optative, 
or subjunctive ; naqoq, with the indicative. 

305. Yet I desisted not, "Ofuog ds ovx uylaTtifii K ' sa , 
before I finished the oration. tiqIv b loyog unoxslto)^-^ . 

Isocr. 
30(5. They are not willing Ov fiovlofjai nw, noh t<V no 
yet, before they obtain some- ldp6ava)' vaa . Thucjd. 
thing. 



28 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



C. "Ore, bnoxs, rjvUa, oTtrjvixa, svzs, when ; insl, inEcdrj, 
after or when, take the indicative or optative, and some- 
times the subjunctive. 



307. He rejoiced when he 
beheld the neighbouring 
ports. 

308. But now by reason of 
your simplicity, he renders 
accounts when he pleases. 

309. The companions 
were amazed, when they per- 
ceived. 

310. When we entered, we 
found Protagoras in the ves- 
tibule of the porch walking. 

311. And whenever he was 
present, no other person put 
the king upon his horse. 

312. He ran forth from 
the tree ; but when the stones 
Jlew, he retired quickly. 

313. When they come out, 
let us throw them with their 
arms into the lake. 



Xalgco im P oxs §Xino) im P yu- 
xvw ogpog. Horn. 

Nvv ds diu 6 v^iixsgog svri~ 
■d-£ia a , sv&vvrj dld(0[iL bwr\- 
vixa (iovioiiai. Demosth. 

Exatgog &a[j.6s(a A - im P > ti>ze 
vosoi fa . Apoll. Rh. 

'Ensidtj 8s elosQ%o[iai A, * a , 
aaxuXa^Sdvco aa Jlguxctyo- 

QOtg EV 6 TtQOGTOOV 71SQ171CC- 

xioa. Plato. 
Kal bnoxs ndg£i(.a - pr f ovdsig 
aXXog fiaoLXsvg inl 6 Xnnog* 
dvotfdXXw im P. Xen. 

Jlgoxgixco * mp cenb 6 divSgov ' 
insl ds b Xl&og q>EQ(o M -°-P r , 
dvaxd^ofiai im P svnsxag. 
Xen. 

e Hvlxa d i^iqxoy.au h " ix: ' sa , ig 
Xlfivr] avzbg avv evxeci (2dX- 
Xb)™' sa . Horn. 



/. c 'Owv, bnoxav, inav, inEidav, usually take the sub- 
junctive, sometimes the optative, the indicative rarely. 



314. I rejoice exceedingly 
when I punish an enemy. 



c Tnsgxoclg(o oxav Ix&gog xifiw- 
gia M.su.?r e Xen. 



CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 



29 



315. When the barbarians 
shoot their arrows, they hide 
the sun. 

316. When they mangled 
thus themselves, from the 
surrounding spectators they 
collected oboli. 

317. Thou shalt afflict 
many shepherds, when thou 
shalt meet. 



Enav 6 (3dg6ctoog aq)lr]iu,L sv,pr 
o t6$si\ucx, 6 rtXiog anoxgv- 
TiTca. Herodot. 

Ensiduv ds xuiaxoTtia} -^ 1 ov- 
T(og ecxviov, ex 6 7ieQuaxr\- 
^a.pa.jj & £ (XTr]s ovUeya im P 
66oX6g. Lucian. 

IloXvg dxaxeco {XTjXo6ozrjQ, bno- 
zctv <xvToia) l *-ff. Horn. 



g. 7>c, otiok, when or after, take the indicative or 
optative ; in the sense of as, how, they take the indic- 
ative, optative, or subjunctive. 



318. When they rode up 
to the Greeks, they attacked 
by squadrons. 

319. The Trojans shud- 
dered, when they saw the 
spotted serpent. 

320. Whenever Minos re- 
quested, they manned his 
ships. 

321. These things they 
did as he commanded. 

322. After love wounded 
me, I considered how I should 
bear it. 

323. Then we will con- 
sult concerning the children, 
how we may educate them. 

3* 



c flg 7TQ0OtXavv(af a irgog o "EX- 
X)]v a , 7TQoa6dXXo) tmp xazct 
rtXog a . Herodot. 



Tgatg 5e Qiyitafi 1 , onox. 
aloXog ucptg. Horn. 



ud(o s 



'Oncog Mlvwg dtofj.ru °'P r , nXt]~ 
g6<o im P 6 vavg. Herodot. 

Ovtog 7ioic(of a wg xeXev(o^ a . 
Xen. 



3 Enn 



tya lyojg titqcooxo)- 



imp 



oiuog <.ftoo) 



o.fa 



avTog m . Eurip. 

TOIS (iovXtVOpff TllQi 6 T6- 

xvov s , onwg naidtvw ,c, ' r 
avTog no . Xen. 



30 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



h. "Apa, avxUta, as soon as, are joined with the in* 
dicative. 

324. For as soon as they ^« yfy nkovtia xal ov pi- 
are rich they also hate you. aica. Lysias. 

i. "&n, where, is generally followed by the indicative* 

325. He learned where 12w&dvopiu sa Xva slfil im P o 
were the Delians. jfaog. Herodot. 

326. They build houses Olxodofiea olxlov Xva avibg 
where he himself directed in -^o'fw* 6 jrf Qa t. Hero- 
the country. dot. 

Jc. Mh when it expresses a wish, takes the optative ; 
when a prohibition, the present imperative, or the aorist 
subjunctive. 

327. M ay God not perform My oviog Osog rtUa ^ 
this thing. Horn. 

328. Receive him not into My Xafi6dv(o *"* avvog tig ol- 
a house - xla. N. Test. 

329. Be not terrified by Mr) xatanXyoaa su -* a -P vnb o 
the cry. xgavyyz. Demosth. 

L El ycto, sl'&s, ug, O that, utinam, are construed 
with the optative. 

330. Othathe may perish 'Jig 6Uv<o"-™ nayxdxtog. Eu- 
most wretchedly. r j p# 

331. O that Alcinous may Al'&s TsXevtaaf' Snag AXxU 
accomplish all things. voog , Horn. 

332. O that silver-bowed M y d Q T yXi m og t3<iXX«>« 
Apollo may smite Telema- d QY v Q 6totog 'A^Uar. 
chus. Hom 



CONSTRUCTION OP CONJUNCTIONS. 31 

When the wish relates to any thing past, rfft is joined with the 
indicative. 

333. O that the sea had AV&s ov novrog, £ivog v , diag- 
destroyed thee, stranger. qaia/ a . Apoll. Rh. 

334. O that we had found El'&s svgio>c(o sa ov, > 'Adfirjiog r t 
thee, Admetus, not grieving. py Xv7i£<o w -* A -P r . Eurip. 

m. El yug, d'&s, <og, are often prefixed to the im- 
perfect and second aorist of oyuXw, with an infinitive 
following. 

335. O that I had re- El yotg ocptiX(o sa tqiu6oXov 
ceived three oboli. Xan6dv(a lVF - sa . Aristoph. 

336. O that thou hadst El'&s 6cptlX(a 8a iv &sog Ul- 
left thy life among the gods. nco l " T - 8a (iiog. Eurip. 

337. Thou hast come i0 Eqxo}ia^ sa in noXepog' wf 
from battle ; O that thou 6<f>tlX<o 8a avzo&t oX- 
hadst there perished. Xvu* 1 ™*- 8 *. Horn. 

Sometimes the particles are omitted. 

338. O that he had come 'Oq>uX<» 8a % 0/ u«i ,WF ** tlq 
into the bottomless gulfs. a6vooog xdopct. Eurip. 

339. Yet O that some "Efinag %lg avrog f aXXog 6<pei- 
other one had obtained it. X(o 8a Xayxdv(o tl(r ' sa . ^Eschyl. 

X. Conjunctions generally couple similar 
modes and cases. Grammar, Rule XL VI. 

340. They sung and "Ada?™? xal xogev<a im P. Xen. 
danced. 

341. Endure, friends, TXruu, 8a , ylXog, xal /xiv<»f* inl 
and wait for a while. xqwos*- Horn. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



342. He slew his children 
and his wife and his concu- 
bines and his servants. 

343. Xenophon came with 
the rear-guards and targe- 
teers and heavy-armed men. 

344. Nicias or Laches has 
discovered or has learned. 

345. In the resurrection, 
they neither marry , nor are 
given in marriage. 

346. Hurt not the earth, 
nor the sea, nor the trees. 



Z'cpdTTwf" S xixvov xal 6 yvvrj 
xal o TtcdXaxt) xal 6 oixhrjg. 
Herodot. 

Zevocpuv s'Q X ofiai^ sa ovv 6 
omo&ocpvXa$ xal niXjaaxrig 
xal onXlryg. Xen. 

Nixiag jj Adxng evglaxto % 
fiav&dvo). Plato. 

Ev 6 dvaaxaaig, ovts yajnea), 
ovie ixyafilgio. N. Test. 

Mi adixiu^^P e y%, R „ 
6 S-dXaooa, fiijrs 6 divdgov. 
■ N. Test. 

a. To this rule belong, not only the copulative 
and disjunctive conjunctions, but several others, as 
also adverbs of likeness. 



347. The city consists 
of more than ten thousand 
houses. 

348. They found no other 
thing than naked dead in 
the campi 

349. All men with delight 
await festivals, but kings. 

350. Him we will treat 
as a benefactor and friend, 
not as a slave. 

351. I behold Rhesus 
like a god standing among 
the horses. 



'O noXig ix nXdiov jj fivgiot 
olxla owloT7i(u. A -P. Xen. 

Ovdslg clXXog svgiox(o aa ij vs- 
xgog m -P yvpvog iv 6 oxga- 
ronedov. Xen. 

n&g av&gumog yditag ngoa- 
dixo[iai 6 eogxTj, n l^ v « 
rvgavvog. Xen. 

Ovxog &g svsgyhTjg xal cpiXog, 
ovx cog dovXog nsgiimo. 
Xen. 

Ogata 8s c P%oog dW dal[i<ov 
torwu^P iv 6 Xnnog. 
Eurip. 



CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 



33 



352. They choose a mid- »i7£oa*oe'o 1 uca fiixgiog (Slog 

dling life with justice, rather ftzxa diy.aioavri]S ^dllov, 

than greed wealth with in- i] nlovxog fii/ag (xex« 

justice. udixla s . Isocr. 

XI. The conjunctions iW, ocpga, ojias, ©?, 
fii} 9 commonly take the optative when the lead- 
ing verb denotes past time, and the subjunctive 
when it denotes present or future. Grammar, 
Rule XLVIL 



353. The Athenians, that 
they might not be separated, 
followed close. 

354. They hauled down 
the galleys, that in the 
galleys they might save 
themselves. 

^•j."». He sent for the 
shipSj that he might land 
heavy-armed men within 
and without the gates. 

35G. That thou mayest 
he still more courageous, 
consider also this thing. 

:5"J7. Thou speakest well : 
for watch me, lest somehow 
I (lectin- thee. 

:'">S. Take the whip and 
the curiously made reins, 
and I ivill alight, that I 

■q? fight. 



'O ds Afrrjvaiog, Xva /zr/ dia- 
O7id(o*- -f a , inay.oXov&i(o vn P. 
Xen. 

Ka&t?j((o' a o Tgirjgiig, wg iv 6 
TQiriQiig owQo} hUO -P r . Xen. 



c O ruvg ^sta7ti(i7iofiai v ^ a / 
OTiwg onXixrig ct7io6i6d£(o°S a 
tXaoi nod t'Sw 6 tivXt] (254). 
Xen. 

'jig di i'u {laMov ■&aqgi(u lv '^ r , 
xal ods xaxavoia/ a . Xen. 

Kttkag Xiym' (pvlaxxia yag eya, 
fir) nr) 7iaQaY.Q0V(ti*- tV! -f a av. 
Plato. 

Mumi% xa* r\viov aiyaloug 
dizofiai/"'*, fym <$' dnoftal- 



Hom. 



oyqa fiaxofica' 



34 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



359. As the sun awaits "jlontQ 6 r t Xiog ov Tzsoifiivco 



TeXX(o su -f a , ovno fitids ov 
7i£Qi[iiv(o lyl xgoTog xal x}jo- 
cpog xal znatvog, Xv sv noi- 
sco 5U 'f a . Epict. 



not prayers and incanta- 
tions, that he may rise, so 
neither do thou await ap- 
plauses and shouts and 
praises, that thou mayest 
benefit. 

a. e Jlg, wots, that, so that, take the indicative or 
infinitive. 

360. He has so great Jvva^ig <5' %%& tooovrog, cog, 
power, that, having been vnb <t>aQvu6at,og g udi- 



injured by Pharnabazus, he 
takes revenge on him. 

361. They put them- 
selves in array, so as to 
Jill the street. 



TlflWQSCO" 1 "" av- 

Xen. 



xm v ' v ^ a , 
Tog a . 

2?WT(XOGC0 U -f a WOTS iflTtXl]- 

&(o w-/« < % £ Sm Xen. 



b. c flg, that, in quoting the words or sentiments o£ 
another, takes the indicative or optative. 



362. They say that thou 
acquiredst great wealth with 
the spear. 

363. He learns that the 
kingdom had devolved to 
this man. 

Likewise tru 



Aiyco oog ov fisyag nXovxog 
xxao^iai M- ^ a ovv &i>Xfiq* 
iEschyl. 

Hvv&<xvo t uai cog o fiaoiXela 
nsQisQ%0[xaL M ' o ' p ig ovxog o 
avtjg. Herodot. 



364. He reported in as- *Anayy£XXo) f a £v ixxXrjola, oil 
sembly, that Lysander de- avr.bg Avoavdoog xecog xaxi- 
tains him so long. x (alIipr - Xen. 

365. I heard that Peri- 'Axovcof" on llsgixXijg noXvg 
cles knew many charms. inloxa^ai -^ iTKodrj. Xen. 



MMMMi 



CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 



35 



Also in the sense of becatise. 

366. Certain ones bring Eyu xlg slg dlxv ayco, ov% 
me into law-suits, not be- oxi aSixea) 1 * vii iyaS. 
cause they are injured by Xen. 

me.' 

367. They were indig- Ayavaxxiw A - im P, on l^w°P r 
nant, that they had kings (x avyxXr^og (iaoiXtvg. He- 
from the senate rodian. 

c. El, if takes the indicative or optative, and some- 
times the subjunctive. 

368. But go now, rouse '.4M'. ffyu ,H -i |r vvv, Al'ag avi- 
Ajax, if thou pitiest me. (jtij/u 111 ^, u eyto iksaigw 1 *. 

Horn. 

369. He sent before chos- ITqo7isfi7i(o fa Xoyag, ug, & I'ttsi^ 
en men, that, if they should pi °- sa , anoxXslb) °f a avtog. 
approach, they might pre- Herodian. 

vent them. 



d. 'Av, in the poets xs or xiv, is put with all the modes 
and participles, to which it gives a potential sense. 



With the indicative. 

370. I should glory and 
think highly of myself, if I 
knew these things. 

371. Then indeed the 
unhappy Ulysses would have 
perished against destiny, if 
blue-eyed Minerva had not 
given prudence. 

372. Whenever being ex- 
pelled he came into another 



Kattvvo)*- im P x^ xal u6qv- 
vG}"- hn P uv, d inlaxa- 
ptn tn ** ovtoc;. Plato. 

Ev&u, xe drj dvoiyvog vniq 
[iooog a oXXvco u - sa D Odva- 
otig, u (ir) tnicpgoovvt] 81- 
dwfii Iw ^ a yXuvxwmg 'A&rj- 
vt). Horn. 

"Ono)g untXuvv(o TA i(tfo^ai A - 0, * a 
t'g liXXog olxlu, uneXavv(o im P 



86 GREEK EXERCISES. 

house, he was expelled also av xal ornb ovtoq f . Hero- 

from this. dot. 

373. Ships might anchor Navg 6q[x%&) ™ %im v av ngbg o 

near the rock, not far from 7ihpa d , ov tto'^w «7to 

the outlets. 6 ix6oXq. Arrian. 



With the optative. 

374. Medocus would not 
applaud me, if I should ex- 
pel my benefactors. 

375. In a great tumult 
how could one hear, or 
speak 1 

376. Hear now concern- 
ing the state. 

377. But how he dis- 
honored, I will relate. 



Ovx av Mrj&oxog iya inav- 
vs(»)P r , si e$sXavvia°- pr 6 svsp- 
yhrjg. Xen. 

Ev noXvg opadog nwg xev xlg 
axovcaf", rj ento sa . Horn. 

Axovco p av ydrj nsgl b noXi- 

tsla s . Plato. 
Hag 8* an[itt£(0f a , iyw (pga- 

£eo w av. Plato. 



With the subjunctive. 

378. He will behold, and Eloomo^ai^ teal ovx av al- 
will not praise. vioa^. Eurip. 

379. Consider now, how &pa£o> M vvv, onfog xs noXig 
thou mayest save the city. oad£<of a . Horn. 



With the infinitive. 

380. But let us go while "Alt slfii tv - sa tag hi ofo/iai, 
yet we think that we shall svnstag xgariio II,T -f a av. 
easily conquer. Xen. 

381. We granted that 'O^ioXoyia^ svdaifiovia 1 **-* 7, 
we should be happy and do av xal sv ngaxxta IIfp J> r . 
well. Plato. 



CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. * 37 

With participles. 

382. Those who would e O yding fiiv av itiyxa p - PA -*», 
willingly be confuted, if they d jlg no prj akt]&i)g Uya) -P r ' 
should say any thing not fjdbcog <5' av iUyxu *•**/<*, e £ 
true ; and who would willing- tlq jig no /xrj alrj&rjg Xs- 
ly confute, if any one should yu °-P r , Plato. 

say any thing not true. 

After the relatives It, oarn, orttt, &c, at has mostly the signifi- 
cation of the Latin cunque, soever, in which case it is generally fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive, sometimes by the optative, rarely by the 
indicative. 

383. He will declare ichat- El'gw og ne -P av av imojil- 
soever things thou may est ?.w 9U ^ a . Xen. 

order. 

384. Whatsoever other a Oaxig™ av aXXog fiav&a- 
thing he may learn, he will vw °-P r , gaov ' fiav&dvco M . 
learn more easily. Plato. 

385. There is Rome, 3 Exzi ufu o 'Pwfir}, onov av 6 
wherever the emperor may (iaaiUvg sl^l BV . Herodian. 

he. 

386. To follow both by "Enotxai xul xaia yij a xal tiara 
land and by sea, wherever tiaXaxxa*; onov av rffio- 
they may lead. fxuc sv -P r . Xen. 

387. Whithersoever he "Onov uv eianogsvofiai IN - im P r 
entered, into villages, or ac xto/iy, ?/ noXig, rj aygog. 
cities, or fields. N. Test. 

e. Via*', by contraction $v or av, in the Ionic poets 
et y.c or ul'xs, if, takes the subjunctive. 

388. I will do these things, JToiio) ovxog, xal ijxw nagu 
and I will come to thee to- av a avgi'ov, (av Oibg i&iXw. 
morrow, if God be loilling. Plato. 

4 



38 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



389. They fight valiantly ; 
but if they dismount, or are 
thrown off, they are easily 
taken. 

390. If some ohey not, 
lead us against these, that 
we, not they, may rule. 

391. If Alexander hills 
Menelaus, let him then have 
Helen. 



revvalojg fidxofiai ' tjv di ano- 
6aivoj sa , rj xaTccq>£Q(o T -f e , 
gadiag ocXlaxa. Herodian. 

*AV di [17} 7lSl&(0 U 'P r Tig, en} 
ovxog a iy<n aya P, 
iyoj, fit} ixslvog agxa 
Xen. 

El psv xsv MsviXaog Atesav- 
dgog xaranicpva, amog 



07l(Oi 



B7ISI& 

Horn. 



EXiv n fyco ,M -P r . 



f. 'jEnst, insidrj, inelnsg, iTtsidrfnsg, inuxoi, Since, for 
as much as, commonly take the indicative, the opta- 
tive rarely. 

392. Since you are very y Ensl ngo&v^so^ai, ovx ivav- 
desirous, I will not oppose. -uoopou, ^Eschyl. 

393. Withdraw, said he, MsTaxagsw fa , 977^ * a , imdr) 
since I have punished thy (y<a b abg ex&gbg rifia- 
enemy. gico *■?. Xen. 

394. Since you are willing, ^Enelnsg (iovXonai, nsgijiiivbi 



wait till I return : I will 
come quickly. 



eat av sya igxofiai 6 " 
qua ds taxswg. Xen. 



XII. One verb governs another in the infini- 
tive. Grammar, Rule XXIX. 

395. They began to de- y Agxa> u ^ a xaTa6alv(o dnb 6 [ict- 
scend from the hill. arog. Xen. 

396. To attack he durst 3 Efi6dXX(o ov toXfida f a , ovds 
not, nor was he willing to fioiiXopai im P diamvdvvsva. 
hazard a battle. Xen. 



INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY ANOTHER VERB. 



39 



397. Hesitate not, said 
he, but try to appease the 
man. 

398. I am not able yet ac- 
cording to the Delphic pre- 
cept to know myself. 

399. If one receives thir- 
teen talents, much more does 
he desire to receive sixteen. 



400. They were not able 
to stop the flux, before he 
fainted. Then indeed it 
ceased. 

401. We will endeavour 
to take care, that thou shalt 
never be ashamed of our 
friendship. 

402. And I indeed, if in 
thy house I should undertake 
to learn to manage a family, 
perhaps should corrupt the 
house. 

403. Rightly therefore 
spoke he, knowing that he 
himself designed to accuse 
me to you. For he spread 
the report that I purposed 
already to do these thin 

404. And coasting along 
they saw the shore, where 
the Argo IS said to have come 
,'n haul 



Mi] dy.iico s , cpr lt ul sa , ul£ iy/Ji- 
qia) s a <xvr,Q y.arangavibj. 
Xen. 

Ov dvvupui nw y.uxa o Atkyi- 
y.hg ygufif.iu & yiyvojoyAu sa 
t\uai'Tov. Plato. 

Uv ruXuvxov rig XapGu- 
TO) M (§ 11., c.) rgioxul- 
dey.a, nolv fiaXlov im&vpia) 
lau6arco ** exxaldstta. Aris- 
toph. 

Ov dvvaucu imp egai m 6 qsv^icc, 
tiq}i> Xuno\\iV/ i i^ a (305) * 



tots psvxort, ye navto 
Xen. 



ufa 



Eyti nsiQixbi M i7ii(.ieliofiai, (fig 
fir t 7iore ov inl 6 ijperepog 
(fdlu d aioxvvio *-™-f a . Xen. 

Kal f'/w 8r), u iv 6 oog oly.og 
imxeiqifa 0, f a pav&av<o olxo- 
ropiw, locog av xaraXvpal- 
ropcu °f a av 6 oixog. Xen. 

'OpOoig uga ).iyoif a , yiyvojoxo} 
on avjog tniGovXtvb) ,m P 
di(tOa)J.b) £y(x) npog ov a * 
i/.cpipwf a yuo o Xoyog cog 
tyi» npuxTO) ovrog oiavoeo- 
pm °-P r i',Sr}. Xen. 

Kcti Tiauanlibi \)fcopib) tmp o 
a/.irj, tvOa 6 y Jpyui Xiyo) 
ooi//> Mfa . Xen. 



40 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



a. There is a periphrastic future, made up of [xiXXw 
and the infinitive of the present, future, or aorists, cor- 
responding to the Latin participle in rus joined with the 
verb sum, and denoting that one is about to do some- 
thing, or intends to do it. Grammar, page 62. 



405. The Peloponnesians 
are about to make an irrup- 
tion into Attica. 

406. I intend to march 
an army through Europe 
against Greece. 

407. If therefore any 
others were about to judge 
concerning me, greatly 
should I fear the danger. 

408. He sent them from 
Ephesus through the Greek 
cities, (he) being delighted 
that they were about to see 
the Greek cities living hap- 
pily in peace. 

409. If even they icere 
about to draw themselves up 
in battle array for him, you 
excel in bravery. 



risXoTTOwrimog {AsXXa uo6dXXco 
slg o 3 ArTi7it}. Thucyd. 

MsXXoi iXavvoj Gioaxbg diet 
o Evqwtit] s inl 6 EXXdg a . 
Herodot. 

El (jlev oiv ccXXog ilg }A,iXX(o i ' n P 
tieqI iya % diayiyvwaxco M Sf, 
aq>6dQcc av cpo6ico M ' IN - im P o 
xlvdvvog. Lysias. 

ni[i7i(ti-f a avrog an "Ecpsoog 
8ia 6 'jEXXqvlg noXigS, 
%dm p - PA -? r on fiiXXco im P 
omoy.aiff 6 EXXrjvlg noXig 
(v elgrjvt] svdaipovixwg 8id- 
yw VA . Xen. 

El xal fj,sXX(o imp vtisq ambg & 
TiagaTdaoco M *^ a , iv dvdgsla 
TiQoexo). Herodian. 



XIII. The infinitive mode has an accusative 
before it. Grammar, Rule IV* 

410. Of these stones they 'Ex oviog o Xl&og q)tjfil im P 
said the pyramid was built. 6 nvQayiXg olxodopiw p, ^ a . 

Herodot. 



INFINITIVE WITH AN ACCUSATIVE BEFORE IT. 



41 



411. And let no one think 
me to be angrily disposed 
towards them. 

412. He spreads a report 
that Xenophon wishes the 
army to stay. 

413. But I think the sun 
to be still upon the moun- 
tains, and not yet to have 
set. 

414. When they heard 
that Sardis and Croesus had 
been taken, they sold the ves- 
sel in Samos. 

415. Artabanus entreated 
him by no means to under- 
take an expedition against 
the Scythians. 

41G. In the morning he 
arises, and orders a splendid 
entirtainment to be prepared. 

417. He heard that Nico- 
lochus with his ships urns be- 
sieged in Abydus by Iphi- 
crates and Diotimus. 

418. But when they con- 
ceded not that Messene 
should be under the Lacedae- 
monians, he assembled a 
large mercenary force, that 
he might make war in con- 
junction with the Lacedae- 
monians. 

4* 



Kal fir t dug ol'ojxat IU iyco dva- 

xoXcug diuxsipai ngbg av- 

Tog a . Isocrat. 
*Ex(pifm Xoyog otl Zevoywv 

/5ovAo//at xaTajiivco^ 1 o 

OTQuzid. Xen. 
AXk oifxaL en yXiog sifil irrl 

6 ogog d , xal ovrtta 5vo) p . 

Plato. 

*Eitsl nvv&dvoixaL sa 2<xgdzig 
is xal Kgoloog aXloxa) x,p , 
anodidwfxi M,sa o xquttjo (v 
Zapog. Herodot. 

AgxdSavog xgfj£(a tmp ^t}dafiag 
avxbg otgaiela inl JFxv&rjg* 
Tiotio) M . Herodot. 

"Eg)&sv dvurnifii M , xal xeXeva 
Xafi7iQog eozlaoig nagaoxtv- 
d'£(ti *S a . Longus. 

Axova)f a Nix6Xo%og ovv 6 vavg 
TioXiogxioj r \v 'A6v5og vno 
*I<pixgdxr\g e xal Aioxi^iog 
(§ 10). Xen. 

'gnu de ov avy%(agi(o tmp Mia- 
Q7\vr\ vno Aaxedaiuoviog d 
ei[ui, $Evixog n * noXvg ovXXi- 
yu) imp , onwg noXepio) °- pr 
/xtxd AaxedoafioviogS. Xen. 



42 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



419. The Persians desire 
that the government and the 
revenue should come into the 
power of themselves. 

420. After this he com- 
manded them when they had 
supped to he present before 
the camp. 



'Em&viiioi niqariq o agxv *ai\ 
b xaQiiaoig ylyvofiai sa iq> 



3 £x ds ovTog dsmvsoi PA -/ aa -P 
nagayysXX(o^ a ndgsi^ii tiqo- 

G&SV 6 GTQCCTOTtsdoV (256). 

Xen. 



a. The infinitive takes before it the same case as the 
preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same per- 
son. Grammar , Rule IV., Exc. 



421. The Thebans having 
come forward said that they 
also wished to speak. 

422. Ther sander said that 
he also was invited by Atta- 
ginus to this supper. 

423. For he said that he 
often in the night, though 
marching with a few men, 
was separated with the horse- 
men from the foot soldiers. 

424. The others said that 
they after having consulted 
would make known their reso- 
lution ; but Xenophon said 
that he would depart now 
from the army and wished to 
sail away. 



°0 ds Or]6cuog nagsg%o- 

TO? @OvXo[ACU 871(0 INF -*°. 

Thucyd. 

G>rj{u sa ds 6 Osgaavdgog xa- 
Xsoj F 'f a v. at avtbg vnb *At- 
Taylvog g em o dsinvoy a 
ovTog. Herodot. 

UoXXuy.ig yctg (ptjfil sa vvxtojq 
avrbg, xal ovv oXlyog no- 
Qsvo^ai PA , anoanaco *f a 
ovv 6 Xnnog anb b ns^og. 

Xen. 

• 

c O nsv aXXog (prjfil im P /Sov- 
Xsvco M- PA -/ ffl - n anayysl- 

Xoj 1NF ff' Esvocptov ds 871(0 sa 
oTt anaXXaooo) M -°-/ a %dn 
anb b oTQccTiot xal fiovXo- 
fiat 0, P r anonXea. Xen. 



■fflHOHn«BHI 



■■ 



VERB WITH THE SAME CASE AFTER IT AS BEFORE IT. 43 



b. When the infinitive and the preceding verb relate 
to the same person, the subject of the infinitive is 
generally omitted, but expressed when an emphasis lies 
upon it. 



425. He weeps, and says 
that he is poor. 

426. When J said that I 
was rich, thou laughedst at 
me. 

427. / think that with 
the assistance of the gods 
J shall easily recover my 
government. 

428. You also he hates, 
and thinks himself to be 
injured by you. 

429. /, O men, acknowl- 
edge that I struck many 
men for breach of disci- 
pline. 



K).a<a xal (pr/fii ncvoftai. 
Aristoph. 

"Ore iyw cpr]fii sa nlovTUOy 
ydaa)f a in iy<a d . Xen. 

Olofiat, Ixv avv 6 &f6g gadlwg 
anolafifiuvo sa 6 «££*?'• 
Xen. 

Zv ds xal fiiutco, xal adixiw r 
vo/il&u vno ov s . Xen. 

Eyto, oi avi t q, o^ioXoyioj 
nsdm f a dr) anw nolvg 
Bvexa areola (267). Xen. 



XIV. Any verb may have the same case 
after it as before it, when both words refer 
Grammar, Rule V. 



to the same thing 



430. Athos is a mountain 
large and celebrated, extend- 
ing to the sea, inhabited by 
men. 

431. He ventured to 
come to Archidamus, and 
begged him to be saviour. 



O > 'AOo)Q si/u oqoq fiiyag xs 
xal ovouuuTog, eg duXaaaa 
y.e.t/rjxo) FA , oixiia r - v *-P vno 
la^o". Herodot. 

ToXf.iu(D^ a l'Qxo k uai K ' tT,r ' sa ngog 
6 slQzld(tfuog*, xal deo- 
(^at ,mp avrog* 0biTi]Q ylyvo- 
fx'at lKFaa . Xen. 



44 



GREEK. EXERCISES. 



432. The Cappadocians 
by the Greeks are called 
Syrians. 

433. After these things 
Theramenes was chosen am- 
bassador plenipotentiary to 
Lacedaemon. 

434. Gelon after not a 
long time on account of his 
valor was appointed to be 
commander of the cavalry. 

435. I love to speak the 
truth always, and / am not 
a wily man. 

436. Immediately the 
Pharsalians had peace, and 
soon Jason by common con- 
sent was made ruler. 

437. After the most rigid 
sect I lived a Pharisee. 

438. He thought that 
through her the she-goats 
appeared beautiful. 

439. I so desire to learn 
to ride, that I think, if 
/ become a horseman, that 
i" shall be a flying man. 



440. To receive this 
thing from those who pro- 
fess to be lovers. 



O ds Ka7i7iad6xr]g vnb Ek- 
XtjvS jsvQiog 6vo[id£a. He* 
rodot. 

Msxa ovrog Ot]QU[ievT}g ah- 
QE(o p f a TiQSofoviTjg eg Aaxs- 
dalfiav avToxgdzag. Xen. 

c O riXuv [1ST ov noXvg xgovog* 

dl* (XQET7) d (XTtodsiXVVG) & 

slfil Xnnagxog. Herodot. 

&ds(a Xiya 6 dXrjdtjg™ act, 
xal ov dmXoog q>v(o A * avyg. 
Eurip. 

Ev&vg {iev 6 OagodXcog (Iqt^vtj 
ay(o m P, tcc%v ds 6 'laowv 
ofxoXoyovftivag xaybg xcx&l- 
atrjfxi a -p\ Xen. 

Kaxct o axgiGyg aXgsoig a 
£aoof a &agioouog. N. Test. 

]Yo}il£(o im P di' sxslvog* 6 «t| a 
cpalva M - 1NF xaXog. Longus. 

Eyw ovxcog E7ii&V(i,s(o \n- 

71SVCO 1NF [iCCV&aVbJ lvr - sa , Wff 

j>(tyi/£w, iccv IjtTisvg ylyvo- 
pai sa (§ 11., e.), av&gu- 
nog nxrjvbg slfxl iar ^ 
. (§ 13., &.). Xen. 

Ovxog nagaXay.6<xv(o naga 6 
cpdoxct) PA -SP igaoxrig S-P sifiL 
Plato. 



INFINITIVES, &,C. USED AS SUBSTANTIVES. 



441. Having come to the 
city, together with those who 
wished to be free he be- 
sieged the tyrants. 



ES 



45 



gcotv, 



ttfia o fiovlofiat pa -' , -p eifil 
itev&fQog d - p 7iohoQY.i(x>f a 
6 Tvganog. Herodot. 



XV. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, 
often supplies the place of the substantive, 
and then the adjective is put in the neuter 
Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 3. 



singular. 



An infinitive, or some part of a sentence, 
often supplies the place of a nominative. 
Grammar, Rule III, Obs. 2. 



442. And to betray them 
no longer was honorable. 

443. To be envied is bet- 
ter than to be pitied. 

444. That the good shoidd 
do well is right. 

445. To go over the others 
by name icould be much 
work. 

44G. When they heard 
th.it which had happened, 
that they were grieved ex- 
ceedingly w as rvidf/'t. 

447. Among the Lydians, 
and mostly also among the 
other barbarians, even for 
a man to be seen naked leads 
to great infamy. 



Kal 7TQo8ldojfii sa avibq ovy.ixi 
dfil im P xaX6g ne . Thucyd. 

*P&ovt(a y.Qiloowv elpl i] ot- 
tndon. Herodot. 

zor t or6g a -P sv 7to«itw INF- P r 
Ufil dr/.aiog. Aristoph. 

°0 uilog a -P ovoijaou duo%o- 
f.iui A,sa noXvg (XV IQ'/OV 
tiul ° . Isocr. 

Enu <$' uy.ovo) Iy ^ a 6 yiyro- 
pt r,PA ' ne , on acpodga uvl- 
do) F ^ a di'j/.og ylyvo^.UL aa . 
Xen. 

Ilagu 6 jlvdog '', a/tdov da y.u\ 
nana o u).Xvg {juQditQoq d , 
y.(u avrjo* onjOftaL ri **f a 
yrurirg f'g unj%vvri (.ttyag 

i(ino). Herodot. 



46 GREEK EXERCISES. 

448. Unless some one El fit] ilg nQoxataXap6d- 
shall secure Cithasron, to V(0 ^^-ff q Ki&aigm>, ov 
get into Thebes will not gddiog slpl tig 6 07}6ai ep- 
be easy. 6dXXu ,NF - sa . Xen. 

So also with impersonal verbs, (which otherwise have no 
nominative.) 

449. It was resolved to Aoxii^ a 3s dva6dXX(a UAVT - sa 
adjourn to another assembly. ig hegog ixxXyala. Xen. 

450. Upon the golden 3 Enl 6 xgvosog /%*o£ s vx 
altar it is not lawful to sa- sl-sari -&vo3. Herodot. 
crifice. 

451. For no longer was Ov ydg hi iyxcogel A - im P piva, 
it practicable to stay, on did 6 nXrj&og a . Xen. 
account of the multitude. 

452. It is lawful to sail v E^saxi dnonXsa ex 6 Xipl\v 
away out of the harbour, ovtog, onoi av xlg fiovXo- 
whithersoever one pleases. pai so . Demosth. 

453. It teas decreed to Aoxu^ a 6 ts Xiprjv ano/m- 
block up the harbours, ex- vvo)™ F -f a nXr\v slg (277), 
cept one, and to repair the xal o tuxog evTQ£7il£<a 1 '* F -P r , 
walls, and to set watches. xocl cpvXaxrj e(fiazTjpi lsT -P r . 

Xen. 

a. Frequently a substantive verb takes for its sub- 
ject, instead of an infinitive or part of a sentence, the 
subject of an infinitive or part of a sentence, with 
which the adjective agrees in gender, number, and case 
Grammar, Rule II., Obs. 3. 

454. It is right that we AlxaiogV- m dpi P ,lst pers ' did 6 
on account of our zeal save ^{xhegog nQo&Vfila a ovtoq 
both him and us. ts o(6£w INF ^ a xotl iyu. 

Lysias. 



MBB^^^HM 



NEUTER ADJECTIVES REFERRED TO XQW a 0R TlQa/fia. 47 



455. It becomes manifest KarudrjXog P ,m de ylyvo- 



both in wars and in hunt- 
ings that they preserve emu- 
lation in their minds. 

456. Lysis often looked 
at us, and it was evident 
that he desired to approach. 



pai P- 3d P er3, xal iv 6 noXe- 
p.og xal iv 6 &r\ga on 
<jw£w imp 6 cpiXoveixog ne iv 
6 ifjvxq. Xen. 

Avoig -frapa iniaxo- 
nibi MAm P iyd), xal dijXog sm 
il[xl tm P im&vniw**- 7ZQ0OSQ- 



Xopai 



Plato. 



XVI. An adjective in the neuter gender 
must often be referred to x^W a or Trpa^a 
understood. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 4. 



457. He showed that dili- 
gence is profitable. 

458. Fortune is blind and 
miserable. 

459. They think riches 
more useful than brothers. 

460. In cities having 
good laws virtue is most 
honorable. 

461. Nature is confessed; 
but laws, orderly. 

462. Unskilfulness with 
modesty is mere profitable, 
than dexterity with arro- 
gance. 



/}tixvo)f a on xeodaXeog elfu 
6 impeXeia. Xen. 

TvcpXbg xal dvaxrjvog elfxl 6 
Tv%r]. Men and. 

Xorjaipog vo^a) XQV^ aV % 
adeX<p6g* (§ 10., a.). Xen. 

Ev 6 evvojuog noXig jlfiiog si pi 
6 aomy. Plato. 

c pev cpvaig si pi axaxiog ' 
o de vo t uog, idaoo) r - PA -P. 
Demosth. 

*Apu&la per a owepooovvr) " w- 
(peXipog (ilpl), i] dtSioTTjg 
pixa uxoXuuluZ. Thucyd. 



48 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



XVII. Adjectives referred to substantives 
are often used for adverbs, or for substantives 
in the dative, particularly adjectives denoting 
time. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 8. 



AVQLOV (JV 
a • 



ngtav ayia ngog 
avTog " ' xal sl'db) ™ ,p , cm 
tnu8av av ud(a au ' sa , aa^is- 



vog 



p.m 



OVVTgt%(0 



M < Xen. 



Ogaco 6 epilog nag i&sXovoi.og 
ovvsTiof.iai. Xen. 



463. To-morrow early we 
will bring you to them ; and 
I know, that when they see 
you, they will gladly assem- 
ble. 

464. We see all thy 
friends voluntarily accom- 
panying. 

465. In the evening he c Ean(giog 5' l'gxo[iai A ' sa " ami- 
came ; and immediately into na <f slg svgvg ansog iXav- 
the wide cave he drove his vaJ a nlcav pijXov. Horn, 
fat sheep. 

466. But come, eat food *Ak$ ayco im -p, ia&ia figa^ 
and drink wine here all aal nlvto oivog av&i navr\- 
day. psgiog p 

467. They took many ylafi6dva) s 
both slaves and cattle ; and nodov xal ng66axov ' xai 
they arrived the sixth day at dcpixvsofiav sa sxialog elg 
Chrysopolis. XgvaonoXig. Xen. 

So also participles in some instances. 

468. At last they were TsXtvxda PA *- m ds nsl&(o p f a 
persuaded to receive sure- syyvyxyg nag iywS di%o- 
ties from me. ^ai M - INF A Isocr. 

469. Open, open thou 'Avolyco™- 9 , avolyca avv(a VK ^ a 
quickly the school. 6 cpgovTioxrigiov. Aristoph. 

470. I will do these Jloiica ovzog, aXXa dagger** 
things, but speak thou Xiyco. Plato. 

boldly. 



l . Horn. 
noXvg aal uvSgd- 



GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



49 



XVIII. One substantive governs another in 
the genitive (when the latter substantive signifies 
a different thing from the former). Grammar^ 
Rule X. 



471. The cattle know the 
voice of the herdsman. 

472. The hare is terrified 
by the barking of the dogs. 

473. Anactorium lies at 
the mouth of the Ambracian 
gulf- 

474. When the priest of 
Apollo crowns the stern of 
the ship. 

475. The water of the 
Phasis putrefies not, but re- 
mains pure even beyond the 
tenth year. 

17G. After the irruption 
of the JPcloponnesians, im- 
mediately Lesbos, except 
Methymne, revolted from the 
Athenian-. 

477. By reason of the 
heaviness of his voice a cer- 
tain humming sound arising 
in the chamber made indis- 
tinct the things said. 

478. He was observing 
both the whizzing of arrows 
and the clashing of spears. 

5 



c O fiovg 6 cpMVT] 6 fiovxoXog 
yvaql^o). Auct. Geop. 

'0 Xctycjg vtio 6 xXayyrj g 6 
xvoiv ixTxlrixTbi. Arrian. 

Avuxxooiov xelfzai inl 6 oio- 
[iu d 6 AftTtQaxixog xoXuog. 
Thucyd. 

Ensidav 6 Ugsvg 6 AnoXXoav 
oiscpQ) sv f a 6 nqvava 6 
nXolov. Plato. 

c O vdojQ 6 ftuoig ov orjno) u , 
aXXtt fiivo) axgai(pVT}g ne 
(§ 14.) xal vnsg dixuTog 
ixog a . Arrian. 

Mstu 6 ia6oXrj 6 TIsXoTtovvtj- 
OL.og, ev&vg AioSog, nXtjV 
Mrj&vfivr} (§8.), acplojr}- 
f u *- sa an AOrivaiog. Thu- 
cyd. 

Aiu 6 ftaQVTrjg a 6 cptovi) 
(3o t u6og rig ev 6 olxrjfiu yi- 
yvo/xai uocKprjg Ttoitu imp 6 
Xiyw P - PA -P r . Plato. 

2x{,nTonai imp o'iorog t£ (>6l- 
£og xulSoimog uxwv. Horn. 



50 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



479. Nor found they the 
officers of the guards sleep- 
ing, but all sat watchfully 
with their arms. 

480. They entered about 
the first sleep with arms into 
Platcea of JSosotia. 

481. They departed, not 
towards Peloponnesus, but to 
JEolis, and Pleuron, and to 
Proschion of JEtolia. 

482. On account of his 
hatred of the Lacedemo- 
nians he approached not. 

483. Who shall separate 
us from the love of Christ ? 

484. O that neither any 
desire nor love of the chase 
may ever seize you, nor of 
angling. 



Ovds fj,sv svooj PA - a P cpvXa!; 
rj/rJTGJQ svglaxco sa , aX£ 
iygrjyogrl avv rsv/og rj- 
fioti lm P nag. Horn. 

EatQXo^iai A5a ntgl ngSxog 
VTtvog* %vv onXov ig IlXd- 
zaia 6 BoiojTict. Thucyd. 

3 Ai'ax(0Qsa>f a , ovx inl Udonov- 
vrjoog S, aX£ ig 6 AloXig, xal 
HXsvgav, xal ig Ilgoo/iov 
6 AhcaXla. Thucyd. 

Aim o [uaog 3 - b Auxsdaifioviog 
ov nXrjoid^oi wl P. Xen. 

Tig iyoi %(ogt,£a) dnb b aydnr\ 
6 Xgiaiog ; N. Test. 

.Elds ah [xr\T£ Tig ini&vfxltx 
jUtjt sgojg o &qga ttots Xajj.- 
6dvu sa (§ 9. l.) } fltids 
uyxiGTQua. Plato. 



a. The substantive which governs the genitive is 
often understood. Grammar, Rule X, Obs. 3. 



485. They ordered me 
to follow with them to the 
house of Damnippus. 

486. In the temple of Am- 
nion he was called the son of 
Jupiter by the priest. 

487. I never yet asked 
them if they meant the son 
of Sophroniscus. 

488. Paris married the 



KsXsvco imp iyu [is& 3 avzov 6 
dxoXov&sco (§ 13.) slg Adp- 
vuinog (6 dwpa). Lysias. 

3 £v d* "A^ficov (o Ugbv) vnb 
6 nQOcprjTtjg S nalg Zevg 
ngoaayogsvca v -f a . Plut. 

Ovtkotzots avxbg dvSg(OT(Xb)-' a 
si 6 (vlbg) 2(acpQOvioxog 
Xiyu °-P r . Plato. 

Ildgig oe ydfi<»f a 6 (&vydxi]g) 



GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



51 



daughter of Jupiter, but not Zslg, y^ t uw PA, ^ a 8s fit], 01- 

having married, he would yuio P - Ti -P r b x?j<5o? %w l *- im P 

have formed at home an alii- £v dopog p. Eurip. 
ance not spoken of. 

b. Substantive pronouns are governed in the genitive 
like substantive nouns. Grammar, Rule X., after Obs. 5. 

4S9. Go out of thy land, ^'o^ouat A - sa ex 6 yr\ ov, v.al 

and out of thy kindred. £x 6 ovyyivua ov. N. Test. 

490. They hired not our Ov fxLO&6b) fa iym 6 ohog, I'owg 
house, perhaps they will say. el'gu. Demosth. 

491. And they laid their Kal £7it6dXX(o sa 6 y w HQ avxov 
hands on the apostles, and inl 6 unooroXog a , xal tI&tj- 
put them in the common p" avibg iv TTjgrjoig 
prison. drjfxooiog. N. Test. 

So also adjective-pronouns when used as substantives, or hav- 
ing a noun understood. 

492. He was killed by y £*uvog pav &i>joxco A -P vnb 
you, and Ms son has the ovS, 6 ds naig exslvog 6 
government. «^jj I'^oj. Xen. 

493. Of him he had put Ovxog 6 ddeXrpbg dvcugsaP 1 , 
to death the brother, accused, dia6dXX(» PPA / a ^iv, ovx 
but not convicted. (Xiyxu PPA -/ a 8i. Herodian. 

c. The possessive pronouns are equivalent in signifi- 
cation to the genitive of the personal pronouns. Some- 
times also, like the genitive, they are taken passively. 

494. From this accusation 3 Ex ovxog 6 xuxr t yogla o ffibg 
the calumny against me has diuCoXr] yLyvopui™*. Plato, 
arisen. 

405. I am present, being riugu^i, <Wx« vnb b"j:XXr t vt 
persecuted by the Greeks on dtu 6 obgtpdla*. Thucyd. 
account of my friendship 
towards thee. 



52 GREEK EXERCTSES. 

XIX. The genitive is used to express that 
one thing is the quality or circumstance of an- 
other. Grammar, Rule XI. 

496. He left a son of four Tlbg anoUlnto sa xexxagsg sxog. 
years. Polyb. 

497. There was in this Mpl im P ds iv 6 xipzvog ovxog 
temple a statue of twelve dvdgidg dvrodsxa 7ifj%vg. 
cubits. Herodot. 

498. They built near the Olxodofisaj f a ngbg b 'ilgouov d 
temple of Juno an inn of two v.axaywyiov diaxooioi novg. 
hundred feet. Thucyd. 

a. This genitive frequently stands alone, avd-gwnog, 
xgw a > or tne like, being understood. 

499. He was a body- Jogvcpogog xs sifu Kafi6va7]g, 
guard of Cambyses, and of xal loyog ovdslg nw [isyctg. 
no great importance yet. Herodot. 

500. And straightway the Kal sv&ioog «nW^t A -* a 6 xo- 
damsel arose, and walked : gdaiov, xal nsgmaxiw im P ' 
for she was of twelve years. Hfil ydg sxog dadsxa. N. 

Test 

XX. The relative os, rj, o, agrees with the 
antecedent in gender, number, and person; and 
is construed through all the cases, as the an- 
tecedent would be in its place. Grammar, 
Rule VI. 

If no nominative come between the relative and the verb, the 
relative will be the nominative to the verb. 

501. O old man, who in- 3 Jl ysgtov v , og olxia bds Xd'ivog 
habitest this stony sepul- xdcpog, a7iodld(afii, lM - sa 6 
chre, restore my wife. ifibg ddfiag. Eurip. 



m^^m^mmmmm^ 



CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 



63 



502. He threw down from 
the battlements a tile ; which 
having fallen made a noise, 
and immediately there was 
an alarm. 

503. In the Leucadian 
ship, which sunk near the 
merchant vessel, Timocrates 
sailing, when the ship was 
destroyed, slew himself. 



Kaxa6dXX(a sa anb 6 snaX$i$ 
xegu t ulg ' og nlmai PA ** a 
ijjocpog noub)f a , xul avilxa 
(ior t dpi. Thucyd. 

'£nl ds b. Atvxubiog vavg*, 
og neol b bX/.ug a xaxddv- 
1*l sa , Ti}xoY.QUii]g nXito, <aq 
b vavg dia(p&ecQ(o imp , aqpar- 
T(o fa eavTov. Thucyd. 



But if a nominative cotne between the relative and the verb, 
the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun following, 
or the preposition going before, usually governs. 



504. The Sicilian town, 
of which the Syracusans 
held the citadel. 

505. 1 will not refuse to 
tell the art, by which I effect 
this thing. 

506. They retire to the 
two companies, which they 
left by the carriages. 



c O JScxeXty.bg noXiOfia, bgS 
b uxQonoXig Zvoaxovaioq 
e/b) im P. Thucyd. 

Ov q>&ovsca eTtco ,NF - aa b ts^pt], 
di og ovtog anegyd£o[iai. 
Xen. 

Avaxotoiix) nobg b dvo xd$i,q*, 
bg xuxuXsiiib) sa nagd b 
oxtvocpoQov d . Thucyd. 



a. The antecedent often stands in the same clause, 
and in the same case, with the relative. 



507. There is not a dan- 
ger which they do not un- 
dergo. 

508. The grass which they 

5* 



Ovx el pi ouxtg* xlvdvvog* 
ovx vnopivw. Isocr. 



ATjQOg 



n.f 



<5i f 



tut og • vefiw 



54 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



feed on is dry, but it fattens pozdvrj a , dXXd mocha oq>6- 
exceedingly.* dga. Strabo. 

509. The woman whom c O ds yvvr\ a , og a svglaxco sa , 
I found wishes not to come. ov povXopcu sgxo^ai A - aa . 

Chariton. 

b. The relative frequently stands alone, the antece- 
dent being understood. 



510. They send Xeno- 
phon, and with him tlwse 
who seemed to be most suit- 
able. 



HsfiTico 6 Asvoywv, xal avv 
aiiTog (ixslvog) og doxto) im P 
imTrjdeiog ( § 14.) slfil. 
Xen. 



511. Hold; for I behold ^Enloxw p • slaogua ydg (sxsU 
those whom we pursue. vog) og diojxaj. Eurip. 

512. They bring him to "Ayw avxbg nagd o KXsagxog a , 
Clearchus, and relate the xal (pgafr (o ngdy^ia) og 
things which he says. Cle- Xsyco ' o ds KMagxog a- 
archus having heard was novo) f a , Tagdaow r -f a , xal 
troubled, and feared greatly. q?o6sco M - im P oyodga. Xen. 



c. The indefinite adjectives' oaog, olog, &c. are also 
sometimes construed like relatives. 



513. My inexperience all 
know, who know me. 

514. He heard all things 
willingly which they wished 
to say ; and afterwards also 
he praised them thus. 



c O tjxog ansigla anag ibij/u, 
oaog iyo) yiyvwoxo). Lysias. 

Aiaxovo) imp nag rjdioig oaog 
(2ovXo[xai im P Xeya) ' tnsixa 



ds 
ovxojg. 



xav eitaivsw 
Xen. 



fa 



aviog 



But these have commonly other adjectives either expressed or 
understood, which answer to them. 

515. What bride did ever HoXog vvfiopt] numoxs xoaovxog 
so many horsemen, and tar- Irnxsvg, xal nsXxaax^g, xal 



CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 



55 



geteers, and heavy-armed 

soldiers conduct, as would 

conduct thy wife to thy 
house ? 



onXhr^g ngoni/xTtb) f a , 000$ 
o oog yvvr\ ig o aog oixog 
7iQoneij.7i(o f a uv ; Xen, 



— and are often applied to different substantives. 

516. Thou thinkest that 'llyiopai Toaovxog jehjx^qiov " 
thou producest as many ar- nagsxo} M - lT,F (§ 13., b.) 
guments, as thou hast writ- boog tuq Xoyog ygdyio P. 

ten discourses. Plato. 

d. The relative is often attracted into the case of 
its antecedent. Grammar, Rule VI., Exc. 1. 



517. With the treasures 
which my father left. 

518. To purchase the 
necessaries from the market, 
which they furnished. 

519. And having come 
to Arcadia, he desired Ce- 
pheus, with the twenty sorts 
whom he had, to assist him 
in fighting. 

V20. They no longer ob- 
served the laws, which they 
received from their ances- 
tors, nor continued in the 
customs, which formerly they 
had. 

021. After he had done 
these things, he sends to 
Cyaxares, and by letter re- 
quested him to come to the 



2vv 6 xtrjoavpog bg tuxttjo 
hoctuXsItioj sa . Xen. 

O emrrjdeiov oiviofxai iv. 6 
ayopd, bg 7iaQe^o) im fi. Xen. 

Kul 7zupuylyvo l ucu F/L - sa elg 
Apy.udia, a$i6(i) im P Kycpevg 
fitju 6 naug ° , bg v/m im P, 
u/.ooi, ovpfiaxew. Apollod. 

Ovy.ixi o rofxog <pvXurT(o xm P, 
bg napu 6 npbyovog 8 -napa.- 
Xufifiuvo) sa , ovd* iv 6 rjdog 
i/J t uir(o tm P, bg npoxiqov 
l'/o) im P. Isocr. 

J^nu de ovxog dtunpuoob) M -f a t 
nijino) Tigog Kva^ugT]g & , 
y.dl iauniXlu ltnp ijx(o av- 
log & tnl o oipdjevpa*,' 



56 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



army, that they might con- 
sult about the fortresses 
which they had taken. 



emeu? nsgl 6 q>govglov&, o( 
Xap6dvco P l , ftovXsvoi M -°A 
Xen. 



The antecedent is often found in the same clause with the 
relative attracted. 

522. He had overcome mxdw $vv og d uvrbg %vXXsyta fa 
with the cavalry which he lnnixog d . Xen. 
himself raised. 

523. He himself steals Avzbg vnE&gxofiou fistf og * 
away with the guard which e/co im P cpgovgoc * nsgl eav- 
he had about him. tov & . Herodian. 



Frequently it is understood. 

524. He learned obedi- 
ence by the things which 
he suffered. 

525. But I, said Xeno- 
phon, with those whom I 
have, will seize the emi- 
nences. 

526. Having come into 
the plain of Thebe, he en- 
camped near the temple, 
and there besides that which 
he had he collected from 
every quarter a very nu- 
merous army. 



Mav&dva sa dnb (o ngdyfiot) 
og% ndax(o sa b vnaxo^. 
N. Test. 

''Alt iya, cpT]fil sa 6 Esvocpav, 
ovv (ixslvog) og d t#o>, o 
axgov xaxaXa^iSdvoi^. Xen. 

:> Acptxvso^.at VK,sa ds ig Ori6r] ns- 
dlov, xaraargaronsdsv(o v ^ a 
nsgl o Isgbv*, xal ixsl ngbg 
(ixslvog d ) og d sx(o im P £v>U 
Xsyco im P navT(xx6&£V nap,- 
nXrj&Tjg argciTsvfia. Xen. 



c. The relative frequently differs in number from 
the antecedent, when the idea of plurality is involved 
in the singular. Rule VL } Exc. 2. 

527. I stopped the other "jXkoq navw im P fivrjarrig, o tig* 
suitors, who did such things. roiovxog ys gi£(o°. Horn. 



^m 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 57 

528. They took the pro- AauGuvw im P 6 inn-fid eiov 
visions which any one saw ooxig s,no xlg oquco frxog 
within the army. o ydkuy* (§ 8-, Ex. 262.). 

Xen. 

f. When the relative is placed between two sub- 
stantives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in 
gender with the latter. Rule VI., Exc. 3. 

529. And take the hel- Kul b nsgixtcpalala 6 oaxrj- 
met of salvation, and the gtov ds^ofxai 1M -/ a P, xul 6 
sword of the spirit, which fudxaiga 6 Tivtvfia, og ne slfil 
is the word of God. gypa Osog. N. Test. 

When the antecedent is a part of a sentence, the relative is 
put in the neuter gender. 

530. They suspected some c Tno7ixBvto im P rig acplaxrj- 
(of the cities) would revolt fxt **msff (§ 13.) n g^ g £ 
to the Argives ; which also ^Agystog a * oonsg xal ylyvo- 
happened. (iui sa . Thucyd. 

531. They grieved that "Jx&oficu ""* b'xi h %#o~ 
the Greeks who went with put A - FA - sa "MXyv avv avxbg 
them had jlcd } which they (ptvyw, og ovnia ngoo&sv 
never before had done dur- nouco iv 6 axgaxda. Xen. 
ing the expedition. 



XXI. The article is often separated from its 
substantive by adjectives, participles, adverbs, 
or prepositions with their cases. Grammar, 
Rule VIIL, 6. 

532. The ancient contests 'O nuXrubg ayo)v vaxtgov elgoj. 
we afterwards will relate. Isocr. 



58 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



533. I think him to la- 
ment Ms present poverty. 

534. The irruption into 
the Carduchians they make 
thus. 



Oi[i(u 5' avrbg odvgofxai 
(§ 13.) o ndgeipi FA nevla. 
Isocr. 

8 elg 6 Kagdov/og i[x6oXr] 
(o8e 7roi£oj M . Xen. 



When these words, for the sake of greater emphasis or clear- 
ness, are put after the substantive, they are preceded by the 
article. 



535. Your power is not 
able to protect the places 
by the sea. 

536. They came to the 
gate of iron which led into 
the city. 

537. And after these 
things was read the letter 
from Philip. 

538. The Stratians raised 
a trophy of the battle against 
the barbarians. 



c O dvvajxig o vpiiegog ov 8v- 
va-iiai o x w Q' l0V o iv o #«- 
Xuixa <5iaaw£w. Demosth. 

y 'EQXO{xai A,sa em 6 nvXt] a o 
OLdrjgsog*' { , 6 cpigco PA,a - f slg 
o n6Xig. N. Test. 

Kal [aetcc omog avayiyvia- 
oxoj imp 6 inioToXr] 6 naga 
6 fPilmnog s. Demosth. 

°0 8e 2Tgauog rgonaiov Xovr)- 
fiif a 6 fid/r] 6 ngbg 6 /&xo- 
6otgog. Thucyd. 



a. Frequently adverbs with the article prefixed are 
equivalent to adjectives. Grammar, Rule II. , Obs. 10. 



539. They put to flight 
all the rear guards. 

540. He excelled in all 
honorable actions, by reason 
of his constant practice. 

541. Many and necessary 
delays happened during the 
intervening time. 



Tgenco M J a nag 



omo&ev 



cpvla%. Xen. 
diacpigw tmp iv nag 6 y.aXog 
egyov, dia 6 del fieXhi] -. 

Xen. 

JToXvg xal avaynatog diatgi6r) 
ylyvofiai sa iv b fxeta^v 
Xgovog. Demosth. 



COxXSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 



59 



542. He is conveyed by duxxo(d£a vn avxbg g eg 6 
them into the continent op- ^neigog 6 xaxuvTiy.gv. Thu- 



posite. 

543. The army came to 
the pass, which leads - from 
Macedonia the loiccr to 
Thessaly. 



cyd. 
arguTog uq>ixvio(icu sa t'g o 
tu6olr], baneg unb Maxedo- 
vla o xuva ig Oeooa/Jot 
(ptga). Herodot. 



Hence they acquire the character of substantives. 

544. He orders him to Kehvo) avxbg 7Tagaylyvo[j,cM sa 
come to the front. rig b ngoa&ev (fxegog). Xen. 

545. It is worth while "Asiog™ xolvvv (el fit) xui exel- 
therefore to consider also rog e$exu£a)f a , nwg noxk o 
that thing, how formerly the nalai o r/pj vesica *"-*. 
ancients bestowed honors. Demosth. 

b. In like manner genitives are placed either between 
the article and the substantive by* which they are gov- 
erned, or after the substantive with the article before 
them. Grammar, Rule VIII. , 6. 

546. The government of c O 'PufAuiog Svvuaxuu (uexa- 

He- 



7U7ttco j " sig (xovagxia. 
rodian. 



the Romans changed into a 
monarchy. 

547. Such things you 
saw in the comedy of Aris- 
tophanes. 

548. Laches with the Auxr t g axgaxevco^ jxexu b $vj.i- 
allies made war upon MyltB ftuxogS inl Mvhti* b a -?- f 



Toioviog bguh) im P ev b Agi- 
oioyuvrrf xu pojdla. Plato. 



of the Mcssenians. 

">19. And now going to 
the tent of Xcnophon, they 
said that they had not pro- 
visions. 



6 MiouTjviog. Thucyd. 
Kul i'jdr) e'nl axtp •>, a tiiu rA - sa 
b af Eevoyav, ie/io"" 1 ' art 
ovx tfom °' pr *> tnm'fieiov. 
Xen. -, 



60 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



c. Very frequently the article is used without a sub- 
stantive expressed. 



550. Withdraw into the 
territory of Pharnabazus. 

551. If thou undertakest 
to manage the affairs of the 
state. 

552. He preaches the 
things concerning the king- 
dom of God. 

553. Thou mightest infer 
this thing also from the per- 
sons on hoard ships. 

554. If he should be will- 
ing to lie in ambush, he 
might take Gadatas and the 
men with him. 



Mna^cogioj^ a - a eg 6 <Pagvd6a- 

£og (xwga). Xen. 
EcCV ETTLXEIQSCO (§ 11. e.) oP- no 

o noXig (nga/fxa) ngdrcoi. 

Xen. 

EvayyeXl^ofiai o p,ne neql 6 
PaaLXslaS 6 Osog. N. Test. 

Tsx/j.cctQ(o' u,0 f a & av omog xal 
ano 6 iv 6 vavg. Xen. 

El fiovloficu ivsd()ev(of a , Xafi- 
6av(o °' sa av 6 raddiag xal 
6 ovv aviog. Xen. 



XXII. Partitives, and words placed parti- 
tively, comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, 
and some numerals, govern the genitive plural." 
Grammar, Rule XIV. 



555. He mounted twenty 
men upon each one of the 
towers. 

556. Some of the histo- 
rians say, that he married 
the sister of his mother. 

557. They took the arms, 
but they stript off the gar- 
ments of no one of the citi- 
zens. • 



3 Avoc6i6(x£a im P ds enl 6 nvgyog 
sxaarog a dvtjg sl'xooi. Xen. 

"Eviot ds 6 Xoyonotog Xsyco, cog 
6 a,f 6 firixrig ddsXcprj yd(x(x/ a . 
Xen. 

c O pev onXov Xap6dvco sa , o ds 
Xvtwv ovdslg 6 7ioXhr}g oxv- 
Xsxi(a fa . Xen. 



PARTITIVES, &C. GOVERNING THE GENITIVE PLURAL. 61 



558. They landed many 
of the Persians on the small 
island lying between Sala- 
mis and the continent. 

559. Besides him they de- 
stroyed moreover others of 
the horsemen. 

560. And of two ships 
drawn ashore the inunda- 
tion shattered the one. 

561. He lost thirty ships, 
but the men escaped to the 
land, and the rest of the ships 
he drew ashore under the 
wall. 

562. In Caria the younger 
of the brothers expelled Ada 
from the government. 

563. I believe her to be 
of all women the most beau- 
tiful 

564. What one of the 
-prophets did not your fathers 
persecute ? 

565. Of the commanders 
two escape, and two die. 

566. He sent without the 
knowledge of the Athenians 
a thousand of Macedonians , 
who came afterwards. 



Eg 6 vqolg fiera^v JZaXajxlgS 
T£ xupcu xal 6 jjneiQog S no- 
Xvg 6 Ilsga^g a7io6i6d£(o-f a . 
Herodot. 

Ilgog exeivog^ dXXog ngoaa- 
noXXv(af a 6 Innevg. Hero- 
dot. 

Kal dvo vavg aveXxvco P -' A -.P 
6 ereuog xaxayvvca f a 6 inl- 
xXvaig. Thucyd. 

A7ioXXy(of a vavg xqidxovxa, 
o 8e avrig eg o yr\ anocpev- 
yoj sa , 6 de Xoinog 6 vavg 
I'.to o xe}%og d aveXxvb)f a . 
Xen. 

Kuxu ds 6 Kagla a 6 veog 
6 ddeXcpog ix6dXX(o sa ex o 
dvvaaxela "Ada* Diod. Sic. 

3 E/(x) de nel&co M exelvog a elpl 
nag yvvi] xuXog. Herodot. 



Tig 6 TiQoqpyxrjg ov diojxa)f a 
6 nuxrjg ov (§ 18.6.)/ 
N. Test 

c O orgarrjyog dvo fiev dno- 
(pevya, dvo ds xeXivxdu. 
Herodot. 

IIefi7io)^ a xgvcpa 6 ^A&Tjvalog * 
XiXiol Muxsduv, bg vaxegor 
tgxofiai*" 1 . Thucyd. 



6 



62 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



567. And when thou 
takest the lyre, they prevent 
thee not from stretching and 
relaxing whichever one thou 
pleasest of the chords. 



Kal insidccv 6 Xvqa Xa[i6u- 
voi sv - sa ) ov diaxwlvo) av 
emzslpo) INF, / a tc noil avlr}- 
p iNF. 5 a % g a.f « v p iXopcu ,u 



6 %oydij. Plato. 



a. Other adjectives in the positive degree frequently 
take their substantives in the genitive, where otherwise 
instead of the genitive the case of the adjective would be 
used. 

568. We shall find ambi- JEvglaxot 6 (pd6ri[iog a -P xal 



tious and magnanimous men 
wishing to be praised. 

569. The Athenians in 
the tumult destroyed both 
the resisting and the flying 
ships. 



(xs/aXoipvxog a,p 6 uvtjq 



emxiveb) 
Isocr. 



fiovXopou 



PA.a.p 



'Ad-qvociog iv 6 &6qv6og 
x£QaL'£(o vnp 6 re av-d-lair}- 
fip M - PA - a -P y.ai 6 cptvyw PA - a -P 
o vavg s. Herodot. 



b. The genitive is often governed by slg or tig 
understood. 



570. Thou acknowledg- 
edst justice to be one of the 
greatest goods. 

571. I should not wonder 
if thou shouldst become one 
of the men renowned for 
wisdom. 



'OpoXoysa f a (tig ne ) 6 psyocg 
ayu&bv sifil dixouoovvij a . 
Plato. 

Ovx av &av[id£(a ° ri (tig) 
6 iXXoyifiog g,p ylyvoficu ° mSa 



ccvrjQ ent ooqpia 



Plato. 



572. There went also cer- JSvvigxofiai ASa de xal (jig) 
tain ones of the disciples 6 [xa&rjTrjg anb KaiooiQuct 

from Caesarea with us. avv-syd. N. Test. 



NEUTER ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



63 



XXIII. An adjective in the neuter gender 
without a substantive governs the genitive. 
Grammar, Rule XII 



573. Bat yet hear also the 
rest of the fable. 

574. The goodness of God 
leads thee to repentance. 

575. The accuracy of the 
investigation will not be 
made to appear. 

576. They drove us all to 
this pitch of cruelty. 

577. lie proceeded to such 
a degree of madness and 
petulance, as to reject his 
paternal name. 

578. The most of the ar- 
my, marching with Xerxes 
upon Athens, entered among 
the Boeotians. 

5T9. The Athenians made 
their government stronger, 
and they themselves ad- 
vanced to a great degree of 
power. 



Alt Ojxajg axovw ■ xal u Xot- 
nog o fiv&og. Plato. 

c O XQrjozog 6 d~eog eig (usjavota 
ov w/w N. Test. 

c O uy.Qi6i]g o I'isTaoig ovx 
iliyxto *&. Herodian. 

.Lig ovrog i cofxoirjg unag e/u) 
xa&laTrj i ui fa . Isocr. 

Eig Toaoviog fxavlu xat nagoi- 
via 7iQozo)(je(x)f a , wg 6 nu- 
jqtooq TiQoartfogla TiayaiTio- 



rodian. 



(§ 11. a.). He- 



z O noXvq 6 OTQaiog, afia £eq- 



his 



7100SV0UUL 



Afyvai a , io6dXX(o sa t'q 
Boionog. Herodot. 
Adrjvalog 6 ts UQxr) iyxQaxijq 
xa&lairjiui M ^ a , xal avxoq inl 
fisyuq a ^a)O60) f a Svvu^iig. 
Thucyd. 



a. Instead of the neuter, the adjective frequently 
takes the gender of the substantive in the genitive. 

580. They made an irrup- 'EpSdXXoa sa ng o \inyila, x«* 
tion into Argia, and laid noXvq o xaoa 8rj6<t)f a . 
waste much of the country. 



noXvq o 
Diod. Sic. 



64 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



581. The greater part of 
the gold the Indians obtain 
thus, as the Persians say. 

582. But when the king 
goes forth to the chase, he 
takes out the half of his 
guard. 



c O nlslwv 6 xgvoog ovtw o 
'ivdog XT(xo[iai, wg Hsgotjg 
(prjpl. Herodot. 

'Otccv ds £$ei(ii* v ' sa ftaoiksvg 
sTil &t]qcc a , itaya 6 rifxiovg 
6 cpvXaxi]. Xen. 



XXIV. The cause, manner, and instru- 
ment are put in the dative. Grammar, Rule 
XXXVIIL 



583. And the mortar, for 
want of vessels, they carried 
upon the back. 

584. They court the alli- 
ance of the Lacedaemonians, 
through fear of the Athe- 
nians. 

585. They said that many 
would join, through hatred 
of the Lacedaemonians. 

586. This tribute the king 
lays up in the following 
manner. 

587. They proceeded run- 
ning to the first garrison of 
the island. 

588. And having ascend- 
ed as they were able, they 
drew up one another with 
their spears. 



Kcu 6 Ttrjlog, d/yslov anogla, 

STll 6 VWTOg S (pSQGi lTn P. 

Thucyd. 
c O a,f 6 slaxsdaipoviog £v[i- 
fiaxlu, (po6og o A&rjvotlog, 
■frsgansvo). Thucyd. 

0t]ixl tmp ds noXvg a-p . nqoaxoi" 
Qsa v,llxr ff, [uaog 6 Aaxs- 
doufioviog. Thucyd. 
Ovrog o cpogog \hr}oavgl£co 6 
fiaoiXsvg igonog Toioods. 
Herodot. 

Xcogica tmp dgofiog inl 6 nga- 
Tog cpvXaxTriQLOV a 6 vfjoog* 
Thucyd. 

Kai ava6aivb3 PA,sa wg dvva- 
pai im P, avifiaa im ? aXX^Xmv 
6 dogv. Xen. 



CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT IN THE DATIVE. 65 

589. Another indeed per- "AXXog de ye I'oug nam fa nv*, 
haps I struck with my fist, oncog pr} Xoyxn v™ ° tojLe- 
that he might not be struck fiiog * nalto °' pr . Xen. 

by the enemies with the 
spear. 

590. Here Agesilaus by *Ev&a 6 \4yr\oiXaog [Mcyog fiev, 
an inconsiderable but sea- xalgiog <5' iv&vfirjiua evdo- 

f\ Xen. 



sonable device became fa- 
mous. 



UflSW 



591. With snares they Aa^.6av(o sa figoxog xh v &YQ l0 $> 
took wild geese, and ducks, xal vtJtiu, xal wtig. Lon- 
and bustards. gus. 

592. I should be indig- Ayavaxteo) °f a av 6 eQwnjfia 
nant at the question and xal enw °- sa av, Evcprjueai, 
should say, Speak good w av&Q(onog v . Plato, 
words, O man. 

593. The youths were de- c O veavlag o /.tev avdgela o 
lighted with the vcdor of Ma$iuivog xatQCo Kjm P, 6 de 
Maximinus, but they scoffed 3 AXilat'8qog & eniaxbmTO) im P. 
at Alexander. Herodian. 

594. I behold a child ly- 'Oqccw naidlov ngoxH/uat., y.o- 
ing, adorned with gold and ouica ppa -p xgvuog re xal 
variegated clothing. f'aO-rjg noixiXog. Herodot. 

595. I am her father by ExelvogZ 6 piv yvotg, narrjQ 
nature ; but if you should uul ■ 6 de yXixla avibg * ei 
see her stature, you would ei'dca °- sa ovx av &vyarr)Q * 
not think her to be my lyu s, a XX 3 ddeXcpy a «/"' IWF 
daughter, but sister. aurog* vo^oi°^ a . De- 

mosth. 



6» 



66 



GREEK EXEltCiSES. 



XXV. Substantives signifying the same thing 
agree in case. Grammar, Rule I. 

596. Simonides the poet JZifxowlStjg o Jtoitjxrjg ci<pixvio~ 
came once to Hiero the [icu sa noxk ngbg 'isgwv * 
king. o xvguvvog. Xen. 

597. From iEgeus the Ati Alysvg Aiys~i8au xwAe'w, 
jEgida are called, a large (pvXrj fisyag iv 2ndgx^ 



tribe in Sparta. 

598. He suffers this pun- 
ishment, as they say, because 
he had an ungovernable 
tongue, a most shameful dis- 
ease. 

599. Rhodopis was freed 
by Charaxus, the son of Sca- 
mandronymus, and brother 
of Sappho. 

600. The others, when 
they arrived, plundered the 
city Tarsus, being enraged 
on account of the destruc- 



Herodot. 

Tlvca ovxog 8Urj, w? Xsya, oxt 
dxoXaoxog I'xco sa yXwaaoc* 
aloxqbg voaog. Eurip. 



Podanig Xva)f a vnb Xdga^og 8, 
o 2xa^iav8giavv(xog Ttcilg, 
d8sX(pbg 8s Hancpo). Hero* 
dot. 

c O 8s aXXog, S7tsi8r) %x(o sa , 
o noXig 6 Tagaol 8iagnd~ 
£(»•&, 8id 6 oXs&gog* 6 ov~ 
axgaxumxrig bgyl^m. Xen. 



tion of their fellow-soldiers. 

601. And having made an Kal io6dXXm ViL - sa ig 6 Agysia* 
irruption into Argia, they xaxaXa[i6dv(a "OXnaL, xefyog 
take Olpce, a strong fortress inl XocpogZ lo/vgog ngbg 
on a hill by the sea. b daXaooa d . Thucyd. 

602. And passing through Kal 8t,a b 'Aygala s sJfu PA -*», 
Agraea, they destroyed izm- Aiyuvaia, xafxrj axsi/iaxog, 
ncea, an unwalled village ; nog&ia) f a ' dcpixvsouat xs 
they come also to Stratus, inl 2xgaxbg*, noXig fisyag 
the largest city of Acar- b Axagvavla. Thucyd. 
nania. 



AGREEMENT OF ONE SUBSTANTIVE WITH ANOTHER. 67 



a. The substantive added to another in the same 
case contains generally an explanation, or fuller defi- 
nition, but not unfrequently it denotes character or 
purpose. 



603. They filled skins, 
which they had for cover- 
ings. 

604. The soldiers receive 
Cyratades as commander, 
and went out of the town. 



Ji<p&sga, bg l/tu imp Griyaopa, 
mftTzlrjfii iT *P. Xen. 

e O axgaTmxrig 6 re Kvgarudr\g 
ds^ofiac axgaxriybg, xal I'|<» 



o Tii-xoq g 
Xen. 



anegxoficu 



b. Sometimes one of the substantives is understood. 



605. We women are a ( 3 Eya) ywrj slfil dtrjgbg xaxoy. 
noxious evil. Eurip. 

606. Thus we the Mas- Ovxw 8s (iya) 6 MaooaXi(o- 
silians punish, if any one trig xoXa^m, si rig nctgdvofiog 



should write things contrary 
to the laws. 



ygaqxo 



°-f*. Lucian. 



Or its place is supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence. 



607. The Trojans died 
for their country, the most 
honorable glory. 

609. And then indeed I 
considered how / should 
strip the shaggy hide of 
the dead wild beast from 
his members ; an exceed- 
ingly difficult labor. 



Tgwg 8s, 6 xaXbg xXiog, vneg 
ndxga ^nfaxw in P. Eurip. 

Kal xoxs dt] fiovksva im P ontog 
XaaiavxrjV fivgoot &r)g -&vq- 
oxto rrA -P anb psXog igvoi ^' 
ugyaXiog fidXa /id##oc*. 
Theocr. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



XXVI. The nominative of the neuter plu- 
ral is commonly joined with a verb singular. 
Grammar, Rule IIL> Exc. 1. 



609. Small things are 
small in comparison with 
great things. 

610. Letters shall be 
written on the bark in 
Doric. 

611. The arrows pene- 
trated through the shields 
and through the breast- 
plates. 

612. Very many buck- 
lers were taken, which the 
Greeks rendered useless. 

613.. And thence in like 
manner are exported the 
aforesaid goods, 

614. And other sheep I 
have, which are not of this 
fold. 

615. All the Acarnanians 
fled into the cities, and all 
the cattle went away to a 
great distance, that they 
might not be taken by the 
army. 



'0 Gfiixgog ngbg 6 fisyag* 
opixgog elfil. Plato. 

rgdftfia d* iv yXoibg ygu- 
qxa F 'PPf.j(OQiou. Theocr. 

°0 ds Tol-svfia x^Qito imf> #*« o 
aoTilgS xal did 6 &(oga£ &. 
Xen. 

Tiggov ds ndy.7ioXvg Xa[i6d- 
vcof a , og 6 "£XXrjV dxgsiog 
Tioiico im P. Xen. 

Kal ixst&sv ofioltag ixcpsgo) 



o Tigosgsa) r ' 
Arrian. 



P.PA.p 



(pog-uov 



Kal aXXog ng66axov c^w, og 
ovx eifii ex o avXtj ovzog. 
N. Test. 

Ilag fikv 6 'Axagvav (psvyoi aa 
eg 6 aaiv, nag ds 6 ^oaxrjfia 
anoxcogsoj f a nogga, oncog 
fit} aXlaxo) tv 'P r vnb 6 argd- 
TsvpaZ. Xen. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



69 



XXVII. Adjectives of plenty, want, diversity, 
property, worth, cause, also verbals, compounds 
of a privative, and those signifying an affection 
of the mind, govern the genitive. Grammar, 
Rule XIII. 



616. Ah, ah, there is at 
hand a great conflict, full 
of groans, nor void of tears. 

617. The city will be full 
of merchants and strangers 
and (migrants, of whom now 
it is destitute. 

6L8. The Carthaginians 
were destitute of arms and 
warlike engines. 

619. When the soul is 
purified from all the evils 
and desires about the body. 

620. All the way is bare 
both of wild and cultivated 
frets. 

621. Of what human de- 
Ught thou wilt he in want 
I see not. 

822. But since thou fear- 
T will make thee free 
firm* this far 

083. The Jax;irtfs from 
beginning to end is different 
from the Oxus. 



Ai, ui, nufjloryn^P uyuv fie- 
yug, iih'tor^ aiivaypa, ovds 
duy.ov xevog. Eurip. 

O nohg /aearog ylyvoftai l]u- 
Tiogog y.al Strog y.al ixstoiy.og, 
og vvv iQ^uog y.oc&lor^ui, A,p . 
Isocr. 

'O KaQX^Soviog yvfivbg eliul 
onlov y.al oqyavov 7io).ejuy.6g~ 
Herodian. 

EittiSuv o yv/r) xa&ttQog 
tifil™ nag o (§21.) tzeqI 
o obijja 0, xaxbv xal im&v- 
fitu. Plato. 

Ilug 6 686g ydbg tlfil xal 
uyoiog y.al ijjxcgog divdgog. 
Herodot. 

Onoiog uv&Qomivog evcpQO- 
avvrj ircide^g uiul ov% oquoj. 
Xen. 

Enti 5s T(io6tw, tyio ov jl&r]fiL 
65e iltv&epog cp66og. Eu- 
rip. 

O Ia^HQxr]g uTiaQX^ /^p* 
rikog (§ 8.) iTigog tlpl 6 
"Olog. Strabo. 



70 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



624. All these things were 
thought foreign to soldierly 
discretion. 

625. For this thing is 
peculiar to history. 

626. There are in this 
Apollonia sheep sacred to 
the sun, which are fed near 
a river. 

627. He is unworthy of 
thee, but worthy of me. 

628. He presented a sil- 
ver cup, and tapestry worth 
ten mince. 

629. Woman, these things 
are small, and, as thou say- 
est, not worthy of my gov~ 
ernment, nor of Greece. 

630. They led who also 
were the authors of the at- 
tempt, and they crossed the 
ditch. 

631. He wishes to make 
the youths skilful in pro- 
curing the necessaries. 

632. The country is fer- 
tile of grain, and rice, and 
oil. 

633. If the most wealthy 
shall be indisputably pos- 
sessed of Sicyon, assuredly 
the city again will favor the 
Lacedaemonians. 



JJag ovxog acoopgoavvi] axga- 
■ZLb3TiY.bg aXXoxgiog vo[il£(o im P 
(§26.). Herodian. 

Ovxog yccg I'diog slfil 6 laxogla. 
Polyb. 

Elyl (§ 26.) ev 6 'AnoXXoivla 
. ovxog Ugog r\Xiog ng66axov, 

Og /?9ffXG) (§ 26.) TUXQOC 

noiapog a . Herodot. 
3 Ava$iog (.isv {slpl) av, xaxu- 
%iog S' iyco. Soph. 

/JOlQEOflOuf* Cpiull] dQ'/VQZOg, 

xal xanig v^iog dsxa pva. 
Xen. 

rvvr) y , ods slfit (§ 26.) oy.i- 
xgog, xav fiovag%ta ovx 
a$iog, wg cpr^/j.}, 6 ipog (535), 
ovds e £XXag. Eurip. 

c Hyiofitti mp ds oansg xal 6 
nuga acxiog d[u, xal 6 xd- 
cpgog dia6alvw sa . Thucyd. 



Mr\%avixog o imxrjdsiov /?ov- 
Xofiat 6 naig noiim. 

HoXvcpogog <5' (sifil) 6 x<oga 
rilxog, xal ogv£a, xal sXaiov. 
Arrian. 

El o nXovGiogV oacpwg iyxga- 
xrjg dfil 6 2ixvtav, axe^vag 
ndXiv Xaxbjvl^b) 6 noXig. 
Xen. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



1 



634. I am unaccustomed 
indeed to such like confer- 
ences. 

635. How bold is Bac- 
chus, and not unpractised 
in icords. 

636. He assembled a 
great army, but unacquaint- 
ed icith fighting and hard- 
ships. 

637. If thou wast not 
insatiable of riches, thou 
wouldst not open the re- 
positories of the dead. 

638. The servants were 
faithful, and skilful in mili- 
tary affairs. 

039. I am acquainted 
with JEolis, and Phrygia, 
and Troat, and the lohole 
government of Pharnabazus. 

040. Thinkest thou not 
that thou art foolish, if thou 

iderest not how thou 
i not be unacquainted 
with this I 



'Arjd-Tjg y' Ufil 6 totovtog 
Xoyog. Plato. 

c Jlg xrgaovg (slfil) 6 Baxxog, 
xal ova ayvp>aoxog Xoyog. 
Eurip. 

Holvg orgaTia (i&gol£co-f a , 
tiXtjv ansigog fia%W xal 
novog. Herodian. 

El jur) anXrjOTog ffyu 17 *^ xgrjficc, 
ovx av vtxgbg p &r\xr\ avol- 
yco iri - im P. Herodot. 

IliOTog el/ul o vnfjgixTjg, xal 
imoTrjfiwv 6 OTgaxmxixog. 
Xen, 

"Efinsigog ds upl 6 AloXlg, xal 
6 ffrgvylcc, xal 6 Tgcaag, xal 
6 <I>agvd6a£og (546.) agxfj 
nag. Xen. 
Ov fiwgog (§ 14.) ol'ouai 
tlpl INF (§ 13., b.), e! fxrj 
o/.onio) onwg (xr\ iSmx7\q 
rifil-tf ovrog 6 I'gyov ; Xen. 



XXVIII. The comparative degree governs 
the genitive. Grammar, Rule XV. 



Oil. Thou thinkest not Ovx rjyio/jiai b aog dovXog fttX- 
thy slaves better than thy- iliov ov. Plato. 

self 



72 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



642. There is not a pos- ol>x dpi l Qn $ * T ^ n T ^ 
session more precious than Eurip. 

virtue. 

643. One among many m g iv noXvg Xotog svglaxco °- sa 
perhaps thou mightest find, &, oaTlg ^i rf X si Q(ay 
who is not worse than his nai^g. Eurip. 

father. 

644. Achilles was fairer, U Z dXsvg sl^l xaXXLnv ov fx6vor 
not only than Patroclus, but ndrgoxXog, aXXa xal o ygag 
also than all the heroes. Snag. Plato. 

645. He is more beautiful Evfiogcpog ph mgsvg dpi, B v- 
than Nireus, more nobly y^g ds o Ksxgoy, q Ko~ 



descended than Cecrops, or 
Codrus, more prudent than 
Ulysses, and more wealthy 
than sixteen Croesuses to- 
gether. 

646. Envy, according to 
Pindar, is better than pity : 
the envied have a splendid 
life; but the very unhappy 
we pity. 



dgog, ovvsrog ds 6 'Odvoosvg, 
nXovoiog ds ovvd^ia Kgdloog 
sxxaldsxa. Lucian. 



O <p&6vog olxTiQfiog, xaxot 
Illvdagog* , etftl cifxslvav ' 
6 §aaxalv(o ™*-pr-P Xa^ingbg 
sxa tflog ' 6 ds Xlav octv- 
xn? a ' p olxTslgto. Pallad. 



a. Instead of the genitive, comparatives are also con- 
strued with the conjunction j or fasg, followed by the 
same case with that of the thing compared. 

647. They are stronger 3 lo X vgbg dpi % ov. Plato. 
than thou. 

648. What greater wit- 
ness can I produce than 
thee against thyself? 



Tig fiagrug 

, M.SU.50 . 



TOV S 



fisl^wv Ttagi- 
ov xaxa osav- 
Demosth. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



73 



649. We have to speak of 
more important things than 
these. 

650. They came to Celae- 
nae, where the fountains rise 
of the river Maeander, and 
of another not less than the 
Mceander. 



JIsqI onovdouog nqay^ia^ !^<o 
Xsyw, rj ovzog. Isocr. 

IIoiQayiyvonai sa eg KsXaival, 
Xva Ttrjyr) avadcdoca Malav- 
dgog Tioxauog, xal steqoq 
ovx iXdaawv r\ Malavdgog. 
Herodot. 



b. Sometimes jj is placed between two comparatives. 

651. Thou wouldst call Tga^vg 6 xwga $ nedivog av 
the region more rough than Xeyto °. Plato. 

plain. 

652. See that thou make 2xonew, oTtojg aoqxxXrjg jj xa~ 
thy return more safe than ^u? noiioj M0 ^ a 6 indvodog. 

Eurip. 

are construed like compar- 

c O vi)$ TgiTiXaaiog 6 r^xiqu 
Ttoisco f a diccyiyvuoxb) p . 
Lucian. 

IIe£6g dvvctfiig a&Qol£(t) pl , xal 
Innevg TioXXaTiXaoiog l/w *"** 
6 BoiMTog. Diod. Sic. 

Ev oviog 6 xwgog xufiai xaX- 
xtlov, peys&og d xul t!-a- 
nluaiog o (§21.) inl 6 

OTOfMX d 6 IlOVXOg XQCCTTjQ, 

oc Iluvanviag 6 ( § 18., a.) 
KhouGnoTog nvail&ijftif'*. 
Herodot. 



speedy. 

c. Proportional numbers 
atives. 

653. He has resolved to 
make the night three times 
as great as the day. 

654. He had assembled a 
foot force, and he had many 
times more horsemen than 
t/ir Boeotians. 

655. In this place lies a 
brazen vessel, in size even 
nix times as large as the ves- 
sel at the mouth of the Pon- 
tic, which Pausaniai the 
son of Cleoinbrotus dedi- 
cated. 



74 GREEK EXERCISES, 

d. The excess or defect of measure is put in the 
dative. 

656. He is therefore Elpl ovv 'looxgdirig (§28.) 
younger than Isocrates by viog hog ££. Diog. Laert. 

six years. 

• 

657. By how much soever "Oaog «V (isydlccvxog sl(xl av , 
more proud they may be, rooovxog dvodkcaiog ylyvo- 
by so much more difficult to [icu. Plato. 

be caught they become. 

658. The horses here Elfil <5' o xavrt] 'imtog (isimv 
were smaller than the Per- [tiv 6 IZsgaixog ( § 28.), 
sian ones, but more spirited d-vficodrjg ds nolvg. Xen. 
by much. 

Also with superlatives. 

659. They contrive for Mrixavdo^iaL dy inl o xa&o- 
his return a thing the most dog d ngdypa svy&rjg [ia- 
foolish by far. xgog. flerodot. 

XXIX. Adjectives signifying profit or dis- 
profit, likeness or unlikeness, &,c, govern the 
dative. Grammar, Rule XVI. 

660. But if thou shalt di- El ds diaondca, ovts av slftl 
vide them, neither thou wilt ixstvog XQtjoifxog, ovis «<«*- 
be useful to them, nor they vog av. Herodot. 

to thee. 

661. Whether therefore, ~Ag ovv, cprj[u sa 3' iya, ovtoq 
said I, are these things slpl ( § 26.) dya&bg, og 
good, which are advanta- elfil (§ 26.) axpihpog o 
geous to men ? av&ganog ; Plato. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



75 



662. The oration shall be 
neither long, nor unprofit- 
able to those who hear. 

663. But I judge that 
these things will be good, 
and honorable, and agreeable 
to the spectators. 

664. Orontas soon found 
him more friendly to Cyrus 
than to him. 

665. The Camarinaeans 
were well disposed towards 
the Athenians, but ever at 
variance with the Syracu- 
sans. 

666. The Athenians were 
carried towards Chios by- 
sea ; for Asia was hostile to 
them. 

667. During the war they 
were troublesome, and were 
more friendly to the enemies 
than to Lacedamon. 

668. If we perceive any 
one opposed to the oligarchy, 
as far as ire are able, we 
make away with him. 

669. And the winds them- 
selves are not seen, but the 
things which they do, are 
manifest to us. 

()7<>. It was evident to the 
Thebans, that the Laceda> 



Eifil 5' 6 loyog ovte (xaxgog, 
oiixs avojcpelijg 6 dxovto FA . 
Isocr. 

riyr(6(jy.(o di, on ovvog dya- 
&6q, xal xodog, xal 6 &e- 
urrig 7]Svg Hfil (§26.). 
Xen. 

Ooovxag t<x%v avibg tVQioxto sa 
Kvgog cplXog, rj eavxov. 
Xen. 

di Kccfiarjivaiog 6 fxiv A&rj- 
valog svvoog sipi, 6 di 
ZZvoaxovoiog uel didyogog. 
Thucyd. 

Avdya im P di 6 'A&yvcuog inl 
o Xlog s neXdyiog ' 6 ydg 
Aolu noXifiiog ctvxbg ufil. 
Xen. 

*Ev 6 noltfiog %yxupoLi im ? , xal 
o nolifxiog evfisvrjg u[it rj 
6 Aaxedalfiwp. Xen. 

Ear rig aia&dvofiai' v ivav- 
tlog o oXiyagxla, oaov dvva- 
fitti, exnodwv Ttoido) M . Xen. 

Kul avtjxog nviog /niv ov% 
bono), og ( § 20., b.) di 
noito), (puvfQog iyoj el/j.1 
(§26.). Xen. 

Jj]).og (446.) o Ot]6ul- 
og yiyvopai sa , on i^i6dU 



76 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



monians would make an 
irruption into their country. 

671. He was sitting in 
the nearest seat to Seuthes. 

672. An oligarchy suitable 
to the Lacedcemonians was 
established. 

673. It is not easy for the 
horse to turn in a little time, 
especially if the place be 
rugged or slippery. 

674. It is difficult for me 
to notice each one of the 
leaders. 

675. I do not think the 
route to be difficult for you, 
but altogether impossible. 

676. They make Asia 
equal to Europe. 

677. At every ten battle- 
ments were large towers, 
and equally broad, with the 
wall. 

678. Whoever of you 
wishes to become like to 
Achilles, or Ajax, or Nestor, 
or Ulysses, let him court me> 

679. They have a mode 
of living similar to the Bac- 
trians. 



Xw °- pr o Aaxsdatftoviog ig b 

%iaga amov (491). Xen. 
Ev o nXtjolog dlcpgog ^ev&rjg 

xd&r}[i(u irn P. Xen, 
OXiyagxia sTiix^dsiog o Aaxs- 

dcu{x6viog xa&lGnjfiL A - sa . 

Thucyd. 

Ov gadtog ( § 15.) o Xn- 
nog xdcfXTiTO) iv (xixgog, 
aXXwg re xav anoxgoxog % 
oha&rjgog slfil 8 ° 6 x^Qlov. 
Xen. 

AgyaXsog (§ 15.) ds iyco slfxl 
diotGxomdo{iai sxaaxog r\ys- 
ixoov ( § 22.). Horn. 

Ov %<xXs7z6g (§ 14.) av elpl 
(§ 13.) vo[tl£o) b nogsla -, 
aXXct na.vxana.Gi advvaxog. 
Xen. 
c O Aala 6 JEvgconrj noU(a i'aog. 
Herodot. 

Aid dsxa ds snaH-igS nvqyog 
slfil [tsyag, xen lGonXaxr\g 
6 rsi/og. Thucyd. 

"Ooxig av av ( § 22.) fiovXo- 
fiai su ylyvofiat INF - sa ofioiog 
*AxiXXsvg, r\ Ai'ag, ij Nsoxcog, 
% 'Odvaasvg, iya dsgansva. 
Xen. 

Bdxxgiog naganX^Giog Ijjfw 
dlaixa. Herodot. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



77 



680. There are said also 
other things resembling those 
which are false concerning 
this man. 

681. He showed himself 
obedient to the magistrates, 
and willing to labor. 

682. He wished all the 
Ionian cities to be subject to 
himself. 

683. I was not disobedient 
to the heavenly vision. 

684. Relying on an am- 
biguous oracle, they marched 
against the Tegeans. 

685. 1 think you all will 
acknowledge this contest 
to be common to me and 
Ctesiphon. 

636. But see that thou 
do not make thyself obnox- 
ious to all these things on 
account of thy poetry. 

687. I fear lest we shall 
find certain pleasures con- 
trary to pleasures. 

638. Thou hast a tongue 
the contrary to Orpheus. 



Aiyto ( § 26.) xal aXXog y/sv- 
dt)g el'xsXog nsgl 6 avrjo* 
ovrog. Herodot. 

'Eavrov naoixco xm P tvTiSL&rjg 
o ecQxav, xal i&eXonovog. 
Xen. 

Id^ioto tmp o 3 I(avix6g noXig 
uTiug savrov vnr]xoog elul. 
Xen. 

Ov yiyvouat sa anu&r t g 6 oil- 
odviog oTiraala. N. Test. 

*Enl Ts/sdtTjg a argarevco u - im P t 
XQTjafxog xl6dj]).og nlovvog. 
Herodot. 

Oiuat ds ov a nag av (380) 
ofxoXoyio) 1KT -f a (§ 13.) xoi- 
vbg slul (§ 13.) ovtooI 
6 aywv* iyoi re xal Kttjoi- 
qptov. Demosth. 

2xo7ii(o dr) oTiug {ir) nag ovrog 
i'ro%og oavrov nouot iV -f a di,a 
o noir\aig*. Plato. 

<T>o6i(a u 5e fir] rig rjdovri 
i,dovrj EVQioxaff ivarclog, 
Plato. 

'Oocptvg ds yXwooa 6 ivavrlog 
f/w. iEschyl. 



78 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



a. 



Compounds of avv and opov, also verbals in tog 
taken passively, govern the dative. 



689. Helicon is contigu- 
ous to Phocis. 

690. Such forms of gov- 
ernment axe familiar to you. 

691. He took with him 
one of the generals, who was 
of the same mind with him. 

692. Of the Armenians 
bordering upon us there will 
be present four thousand 
horsemen, and twenty thou- 
sand footmen. 

693. Formerly the Athe- 
nians made the polemarch 
of the same right of suffrage 
with the generals. 

694. Greece was inacces- 
sible to us, on account of the 
war. 

695. After the death of 
Chalcideus, and the battle 
at Miletus, he was suspected 
by the Peloponnesians. 

696. The hide was not 
easy to be cut with iron, nor 
with stone, when I tried, nor 
with wood. 



°0 ds c £Xt,xa>v ovvsxrjg slpl 6 

&toy.lg. Strabo. 
c O ds TOLovTog noXnsla avvr\- 

-d-rjg dpi av. Demosth. 

Il0CQCcX(X[l6(XV(O sa Slg 6 OTQ<XT1]- 

ybg, oaxig upl avrog 6[io- 
yvcofiwv. Thucyd. 

Aqfisviog ds 6 bfiogog (535) 
eya TidgEifiL iTTusig (isv 
TSTQctxio/lfooi, ns^og da 
8lo[ivqloi. Xen. 

TonuXaibv A&ijvaiog opoipr)- 
q>og o noXsfAttQXog noisoi yi ' xmp 
6 GTQartjyog. Herodot. 

y 'A6aTog syw 6 'jEXXocg eifii, did 
6 noXspog a . Isocr. 

Msza 6 (546) XaXxi- 
dsvg &dvaiog, xcu 6 (534) 
iv MlXtjTog fioi^Vy o IleXo- 
7iovvv\GLog vnonxog sifu. 
Thucyd. 

e O fivgaa ova tlpl oldtjoog 
(§ 24.) T^tjjog, ovds Xl&og 
(§ 24.), nnpdco M - PA ^- d , 
ovdsvXr) (§24.). Theocr. 



ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



79 



b. 'o avzog, the same, governs the dative. 

697. You were both born si xal cpvfxi sa iv 6 avzog iyw 



and educated in the same xojga, xal zgecpa *- sa . Xen. 
country as we. 

698. We are indignant, Idyaraxzea, u [ir\ 6 avzog exti~ 



if we have not the same 
honor as they. 

699. He drank both when 
he was prcetor and when he 
was consul the same wine as 
his laborers. 



vog Tiftrj ego). 



Isocr. 



Illv(x) sa 8s xal ozgaT^yt(o FS xal 
vnatsva)** 6 avzog oirog 
6 egyaTtjg. Plut. 



c. Many adjectives which usually govern the dative, 
are sometimes found with the genitive. 



700. This thing indeed is 
common both to the Greeks 
and to the barbarians. 

701. Hesiod also has as- 
serted things similar to these 
of Minos. 

702. For many genera- 
tions they were obedient to 
tin' hi ws, 

703. lie answered that 
they .said the contrary things 
to that which was expedient. 

701. Whosoever blas- 
phemes against the holy 
spirit, is in danger of ever^ 
las t in g p a n ishment. 



Koivbg drj ovzog, xal 6 "EXXyv, 

y.al 6 '^dg6aqog sifd. Stra- 

bo. 
3 £ge(a p (5c xal 'llolodog adsX- 

(fbg ovzog elg 6 Mh'otg. 

Plato. 
'j;nl noivg ytvta* xazi'jxoog 

rifd b vofxog. Plato. 

'Anoy.(jii'OfxuL^ a ott 6 ivavzioq 
Uym °- pr b avpysQG) PA> P r . 
Xen. 

"Og d' av fiXao(f)7][Atb)' ,u S a elg 
6 nv&fUt 6 ay log (535), 
\vo%og ft/ii aiotviog xQiaig. 
N. Test. 



80 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



705. These things are ofcog 6 dya&6v dpi (§ 20.) 
related to good more than ^Uov ? o favn Svyyeris. 
to pleasure. Plato. 

706. I think myself to 'Hytofiat opodovXog (§ 14.) 
be a fellow-servant of the dpi (§ 13., b.) 6 xvxvog, 
swans, and sacred to the xal U Qog fi a ^ r6? # e6? 
same god. ( 6 26). Plato. 

XXX. Etjil and yiyvo[iai, signifying posses- 
sion, property, or duty, "govern the genitive. 
Grammar, Rule XVII. 



707. These things are 
the part of a noble and 
good citizen. 

708. And these things 
he did, thinking it to be 
the part of a good man to 
benefit his friends. 

709. This plain belonged 
once to the Chorasmians, 
but since the Persians have 
the sway, it belongs to the 
king. 

710. All the goods of 
those who are conquered 
become the property of those 
who conquer. 

711. Let us kill him, 
that the inheritance may be 
ours. 



Ovxog tifu (§ 26.) yevvouog 
xal dya&og noMirig. De- 
mosth. 

Kal ovxog noi£a) im P, yyiopai 
up} avTjg dya&og (oyeXia 
o cplXog. Lysias. 

Ovxog 6 ntdlov upl /usv note 
Xogdofiiog, enel ds llioorjg 
tya 6 xgdxog, lipl o (laoi- 
Xsvg. Herodot. 

ndg o (546) o vixdu p -* A # r 
dya&ov 6 vixdu *•**•& 
ytyvofiai (§ 26.). Plato. 

Anoxxdvu * V -P r avxbg, Xva iyu 



yiyvopcu 8 
N. Test. 



o xXijgovofjua. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



81 



a. The neuters t \u6r, o6v, &tc. are used in this 
sense, instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns, 

iflOV, GOV, &/C. 

712. It should be yours to 'TpiTtoog av sl{xl° navco, xa\ 
stop, and to cure such things. idouou 6 totovzog. Lucian. 

713. It is my duty and 3 Epog a ( u* xaX 6 aXXog epilog 
that of thy other friends toiovtoq xul Xeya xal 
both to say and to write yqdepw. Isocr. 

such things. 



XXXI. Verbs of remembering, forgetting, 
beginning, ceasing, desiring, ruling, &,c., govern 
the genitive. Grammar, Rule XVIII. 



714. Thou seemest to be 
jealous, and to remember 
Semele. 

715. And the decree of 
Philocrates he remembers ; 
but the letter, which he sent 
to you, when he was be- 
sieging Amphipolis, he has 

forgotten. 

716. For I should not 
speak, if I were not greatly 
solicitous for all Greece. 

111. I neglect myself, and 
manage the affairs of the 
Athenians. 

718. Thou showost sufli- 
ciently, that thou never be- 
ttotoedst any care upon the 
young. 



J£u inL^TjloTVTiia) el'xw M -P, xul 
6 ^sfiiX-n fivT)[tovsv(o. Lu- 
cian. 

Kat 6 (546) fxsv (InXo- 
xgartjg iprjquo t ua [ivrio- 
jxat, F -P ' 6 ds imaroXt), og 
noog au a 7i£[i7i(of a , oV 
^fxcplnoXig noXiogxew iv 'P, 
imXavOdvw *-P. Demosth. 

Ov yitQ uv Xiyw im P, el fir] 
(xtyuXo)g xr t 8(a u ' im P avvdnag 
6 c £Xld$. Herodot. 

Eftavzov (uiv tl/.ieXto), 6 no-p 
(§ 21., c.) ? 'jld-rjvcuog 

TTOItTlbl. PlatO. 

fxuruig t'mdelxri'iAt,™, art, ov- 
dsnojTioJS <pnoi>ii'C l <j}f a o vt- 
Of*. Plato. 



82 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



719. They were neglectful 
of the truth in their narra- 
tions, but they cared not 
least for both diction and 
euphony. 

720. I admire thee, that 
thou preferredst not to pos- 
sess treasures of silver and 
gold rather than of wisdom. 

721. I wonder at the 
commanders, that they en- 
deavour not to supply pro- 
vision for the journey. 

722. They say that thou 
honorest those who flatter, 
and despisest those who ad- 
vise. 

723. The private person 
desires a house, or a farm, 
or a servant ; but the kin or, 
either cities, or much terri- 
tory, or harbours, or strong 
citadels. 

724. That thou mayest 
seem to desire justice, not 
on account of weakness, 
but on account of reason- 
ableness. 

725. And these things 
were those whicl most he 
desired. 

726. Greatly indeed, said 
he, O Socrates, do I want 



\ 



O (isv aX^&sia iv o occpyyrjoig 
ohycoQi(of a , ovx rjxioxa ds 
srii/xeXsoficci v f a cpodoig xs 
xal svqxtivla. Herodian. 

Ayu-iLa.1 ov, dioxi, ovx ugyvqiov 
xal xqvoIov nQoaigia u ' sa 
&7]oavg6g xxdopcci *•? fidXXov 
y oocpla. Xen. 

Oav^dl^tx) 6 OTpcmiyog, on ov 
nsipdco M ixnogl^w oixrjgs- 
olov. Xen. 

uisyco wg ov 6 fisv xoXaxsvco PA 
Ti^ida, 6 ds ovfi6ovXsva r * 
xaxa<pgovd(». Isocr. 

O [isv IdicoTrjg olxla, ij aygog, 
rj olxixrig im&vfiiw • 6 ds 
xvgavvog, % noXig, % xugct 
noXvg, jj Xifirjv, j$ dxgonoXig 
ioxvoog. Xen. 

"iva doxsw av ogiyon M 6 dixotio- 
ovvt}, pi) di' do&svsia*, 
ctXXoc di inttlxsia* . Isocr. 



Kal ovxog si/il (§ 26.) og 
(uxXlotcc yXlxoiiou im P. De- 
mosth. 

Zcpodga ye, (prjjul sa , w 2mxgd- 
rt]g v , ovxog 6 dgsxT] diopai. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



83 






this virtue. By Jupiter, said 
Socrates, thou desirest the 
noblest virtue and greatest 
art. 

727. Hector. Assign a re- 
compense, except my king- 
dom. Dolon. We desire not 
thy kingdom. 

728. I perceive also some 
kings, who so vehemently 
covet riches, that they do 
much baser things than 
those who are most needy. 

729. For through us they 
both live, and enjoy their 
present goods. 

730. The city was not 
full of law-suits, nor of ac- 
cusations, nor of exactions, 
nor of poverty, nor of 
wars. 

731. He abounds with 
flatterers, but is in want 

of friends. 

'<:\2. If therefore thou 
necdest a master, thou art 
not yet v> 

733. But if you seem still 
to need any thing, speak to 
me ; for with the assistance 
of the gods we shall be in 
want of nothing, 

734. We want not food 
with thee, but a habitation. 



Ni) Zivg (§ 8., d.), wnl 3 * 
6 £(oy.guTr t g, 6 xaXog agsrr) 
y.ul fjsyag i<f>lrifii M t£%vt). 
Xen. 

"E h t w g . Taooa u -f a -* ds /«- 
o&og, nXrjv i/uog rvguvvlg 
(§8.). A 6 X a v . Ov oog 
fouoi Tvqavvlg. Eurip. 

Alo&dvofiat 8s xal xvgavvog 
ilg, og ovtwg av nsivdo) 
Xgijfia, oioxs noisca tcoXv 
detrog 6 dnogog (§ 28.). 
Xen. 

Aid ydg (yd) a xal £««, xal o 
vndg%(o PA aya&bv ano- 
Xava. Isocr. 

Ov dlxrj, ovds syxX^/ua, ovd 
uocpogd, ovds ntvltx, ovde 
noXsfxog 6 noXig ysfito imp . 
Isocr. 

KoXu$ /usv svnogiw, cplXog da 

onuvl£b). Polyb. 
\ 
El 8 ugee ov diddoxccXog dio- 

fj.nL, bvnoj cpgovto). Plato. 

El 8s t/,- Ire ivdiofica Soxifo, 
nobs iyk a Xiyat ' ovv ydg 
&t6g ovbug unogiw. Xen. 



Ov%i xgoyrj Tiagu ov d xgt'i&, 
uXXd fiovt'i. Lucil. 



84 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



735. They begged of me 
and advised not to leave 
the oration half finished. 

736. He entreated the 
Athenians to come to them. 

737. These I touched 
not, but I laid hold of the 
youth. 

738. With his left hand 
he laid hold of this cloak, 
and said, We shall not dis- 
miss thee. 

739. Cease from trem- 
bling, and let go of my 
robes. 

740. To obtain health, 
and strength of body, and 
honor in the state, and good- 
will among friends, and in 
war honorable safety, and 
wealth honorably increasing. 

741. He is happy, who 
has obtained both these 
things. 

742. You shall receive 
hospitable presents, such as 
my house conceals. 

743. The Rhodians used 
their slings, and the archers 
imitating the Scythians shot 
their arrows, and no one 
missed a man. 



/Hopai im P iyw xal ov^6ov- 
Xsva il7l P py xotTodslna) INF - 5a 
6 Xoyog riixuhlrfi. Isocr. 

X^w %m P 6 3 A&r\vauoq ngoa- 

X(OQS(0 1SF -f a TlQOq eOCVTOV*. 

Herodot. 
Ovvog pev ov% anna w - im P, q 
peiqdxiov d' emXapSa- 
voj udm P. Lysias. 

'O aQioTSQa (§ 24.) dvxiXap- 
6dvto* l - sa tq16cjv omog xal 
enca , Oux ayirjpi av. 
Plato. 

Tgofiog navoo u -f a -P } xal p e - 
dirini M - sa -P ipog nenXog. 
Eurip. 

'Tyleia xvyxavw, xal guprj 
aupa, xal Tifirj ev noXig, 
xal evvoia ev <plXog, xal ev 
noXsfiog xaXbg ocoTrjola, xal 
TtXovxog xaXoog av£(o M>PA . 
Xen. 

J ' OX6tog (el/nl), og ovxog dpcpo- 
xeqog Xayxdv(a sa . Theog. 

Siviov xvgew, olog (514) ipog 
xev&eo do/.iog. Eurip. 

e O c Podiog oysvdovdaf", xal o 
2xv&0T0$6irjg To$ev(o fa , xal 
ovdelg dfiagTayco im P dvrig. 
Xen. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



85 



744. He made the engage- 
ment thus, and he ivas not 
disappointed of his hope. 

745. But now, as we set 
out, let us go, and let us hear 
the man. 

746. We beg therefore of 
you with benevolence to hear 
the things which are said. 

747. The Atlas is said 
with its tops to toueh the 
heaven. 

748. The thousand ta- 
lents, which during the whole 
war they desired not to 
touch. 

749. They will be quick- 
scented, if they smell the 
hare in places bare, dry, 
sunny. 

750. Few of them in the 
evening tasted of food, and 
few kindled fires. 

751. But when he heard 
a shout, he leaped upon his 
horse, as if being frantic. 

75*2. And he began his 
defence somehow thus. 

753. It is just that thou 
thouldst lead the inquiry ; 
for thou also beginncst the 
conference. 

8 



c O avix6oXrj ovtoj noiico M '^ a , 
xeu ov ipsvdo) p J a o IXnig, 
Xen. 

elfxi 3V -* a , v.ai dxovco 8V ' fa 6 
dvriq. Plato. 

Ako\uu ovv ai) (xtx svvoia s 
dy.godofiat, IITF -/ a o A«- 
yo) "A.pr t Isocr. 

°0 ds "Alias Xje/co 6 xo^i/qpij 
(§24.) yaw 6 ovqavog. 
Pausan. 

c O x'lUol tocXuvtov, og diu nag 
6 noXs^iog g yXl%o[xai tmp (jLr\ 
amu*f a . Thucyd. 

Evgiv tip}, idv o Xaycog 
oocpgaivofiai (§ 11., e.) iv 
Tonog ipiXog, ^r]Qog, ngooq- 
Xiog. Xen. 

OXiyog fiev aviog tig 6 wnsQCt 
oItov ysvofiui f a , oXlyog 8s 
tivq xulb)f a . Xen. 

fig <5 alo&uvouai sa y.Quv/T], 
uvujtr}du(tif a inl 6 innog*, 
ojutcsq ivfrovaidh) PA * Xen. 

Kul o anoXoyiu wde nug 
ug%(o M - im P. Xen. 

AUaiog m (454) .£fd****V** 
ov n nyiofUu in *'t* 6 oxe- 

yjig ' ov ydq xul x«t«^w 4 
o Xoyog. Plato. 



86 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



754. But come, cease from 
contention , nor draw thy 
sword with thy hand. 

755. They desired to de- 
sist from the war. 

756. Cadmus reigned over 
Thebes; the Carians inhab- 
ited the islands ; and Pelops 
was master of all Pelopon- 
nesus. 

757. O woman, said he, 
the Athenians rule the 
Greeks; I, the Athenians; 
thou, me ; thy son, thee. 

758. He had married the 
daughter of Theagenes, who 
at that time was tyrant of 
Megara. 

759. Suffer Orestes to 
possess Argos ; and do thou 
having come reign over the 
Spartan land. 

760. They were masters 
of all the baggage, and of 
the provision of those who 
were besieged. 

761. He ordered Clearchus 
to command the right wing ; 
and Menon, the left. 

762. No one of the Greeks 
shall ever be master over him. 

763. In the labors he sur- 



AXX a/a 3 , fa'iya i'gig, fur t ds 
Uyog sXxco M x^io ( § 24.). 
Horn. 

£m&vps(of a navco M -^ a 6 no- 
Xsfiog. Xen. 

Kadfiog ds Or\6cu fiaoiXsvco f a ' 
Kag ds 6 vrjaog y.ccToixsco tm P ' 
UsXoTtovvTjaog ds avfiTiag 
IlsXoyj xQaTsa>f a . Isocr. 

'Jl yvvr\ y , s7i(o sa , 'A&rjvaiog 
[xtv aQ%(a o "jZXXrjv ' syco ds, 
A&t]va7og ' syu ds, av ' av 
ds, o vlog. Plut. 

Tausoj ds fivydnig Oeaysvrjg, 
og xar sxslvog 6 xgovog a 
Tvgavvsw im P Msyaqa. Thu- 
cyd. 

Aoyog d Ogiar^g sd(o a xga- 

TS(ti • SQXO[l(U A - p A.«J fe 

ccvdooG) 2foagTi(XTig. ^wr. 
Eurip. 

KVQUV(x)f a ds O (XTTOOXSVT} 

omag, xal 6 (546) 6 no- 
Xioqxsco p -r±-pr nagaoxsvri. 
Polyb. 

KsXsvw im P KXsaqxog* fisv 6 
ds$t6g xs'gag ijysofica ' Ms- 
vojv a ds, 6 svuvvfxog. Xen. 

Ovdslg Axaibg ods dsanofa 

nors. Eurip. 
c O novog (§ 24.) ov fiovov (ya 



VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 



87 



passed not only me, but also 
all the others. 

764. Thou art foolish, if 
thou thinkest that your valor 
can prevail over the power 
of the king. 

765. In these dangers 
Achilles excelled all, and 
Ajax after him was the most 
valiant. 

766. The mountains are 
not inferior to the Ta'ygetus 
in height. 

767. The fine flax in Elis 
in respect of tenuity is not 
inferior to that of the He- 
brews, but it is not equally 
yellow. 

768. They are not the 
first of those who are second, 
but they take the lead of 
chiefs. 

769. The Athenians sailed 
to ^Egina ; and they were 
later by one day than that 
agreed upon. 

770. Cease therefore from 
these things ; for I hear that 
gods have been overcome by 
love. 

111. Neither will he ab- 



7regleiui imp , u).Xa xal o 
a/log uTiug. Plato. 

Avor^og elul, el ol'oficu av 
(3S0) 6 vuexegog agnr, a 
negiylyvouai iyr - sa & (546) 
ftuodevg dvvafiig. Xen. 

Ev ovxog o xtvdvvog A/dlevg 
[.lev uJiag dia(pegai^ a , Al'ag 
5e fieT exelvog a agioxevco-f a . 
Isocr. 

c O ogog ov folnco* (§26.) 
6 Tavyexog xaxa vyog a . 
Strabo. 

e O de fivooog 6 (537) ev o 
'/Dug Xenxoxqg S fiiv elvexa 
ova anodeoj 6 S ' 3 ' { c E6galog, 
elfil de ov% ofiolag $av&6g. 
Pausan. 

Ov devxegog ngwxevw, aXX 
r t ye(x(i)v iiyepovevb). Xen. 



e O A&r t va7og nXeio im P inl 6 
Ai'yiva a * xal voxegi^ia^ 
Tjuega (§ 28., d.) elg 6 
ovyxeifxuL rxf . Herodot. 

Jluvb) M ••^ , • , ovv ovxog ' e'yco 
vug &ebg* axoi'io eg(og 
Tjoodofiai p>IIfr P. Xen. 

Ovxe jig cpovog dewog ani- 



88 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



stain from any horrid slaugh- 
ter, nor food, nor deed. 

772. Nemausus is distant 
from the Rhone about a hun- 
dred stadia. 

773. After this thought 
immediately he tried the 
oracles. 

774. He spared not his 
own son, but delivered him 
up for us all. 

775. So far indeed as this 
I know not if the royal life 
rliffers in any thing from the 
private life. 

776. He begets Pelops, 
of him Atreus was born. 

777. Eumenes is believed 
to have been born of an indi- 
gent father. 

778. He will hold to one, 
and will despise the other. 

779. If therefore we are 
wise, we shall keep hold of 
him. 

780. Again he aimed at 
the lad, and said, Euthyde- 
mus deceives thee. * 

781. 1 beseech you, breth- 
ren, suffer the word of exhor- 
tation. 



%o) v-ff, ovxs figwpa, ovxs 
sgyov. Plato. ._, 
/Jdxco ds 6 Ns^iavoog { 6 c Po- 
davbg nsgl sxaxbv oxddtog*. 
Strabo. 

Msxcc o dtdvota ovxog avxUa 
CtTXOTXEtgdcO ™- im P o {tavxsiov. 

Herodot. 

I'd tog vlbg ov cpsldofj.ai^ a , 
aXX vnsg eycb § nag naga- 
dld(0}itf a avxog. N. Test. 

Mixgt ys ovxog (§8.) ovx 
sl'da"* h riff (§24.) dia- 
q>sgca o xvgavvtxbg /5/off o 
tdtcaxixbg filog. Xen. 

Ovxog yvxevco UiXoip, ods 
'Axgevg (pvy,t A - sa . Eurip. 

Ev[xivrig naxr\g anogog m- 
oxevco F 'P ylyvo t uai ™ r - sa . 
iElian. 

Elg uvxixco M «#j xal 6 sxsgog 
xaxcccpgovea. N. Test. 

"Hv ovv oacpgoviw BV , e'x<o M Sf 
avxog. Xen. 

JldXiv oxoxdi&tACtt im P 6 flSlQa- 
xtov, teal ETxoj sa , E^anaxdoa 
ov Ev&vdrj/xog. Plato. 

UagaxaXsa) ds ov, ddsXqpbg, 
avs/a M 6 Xoyog 6 nagdxXt]- 
otg. N. Test. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



89 



XXXII. Transitive verbs govern the geni- 
tive, when the action does not affect the whole 
of any thing, but a part only. Grammar, Rule 
XIX. 



782. Pour in then a liba- 
tion, and bring hither of the 
entrails. 

783. When he prostrates 
his first man, he drinks of 
his blood. 

784. Then I ate not beans, 
for I philosophized ; but now 
I would eat. 

785. They say that the 
priestess at Delphi, after she 
drinks of the sacred foun- 
tain, immediately becomes 
divinely inspired. 



*EyyJoi s 8r\ onovdrj, xal 6 
onkayyvov cpsQio B devgl. 
Aristoph. 

3 JLnuv 6 ngwiog ctvrjg xctTCt- 
6u).).(o av,sa , 6 alfia ifinboj. 
Herodot. 

Tote per uvx ia&l(o tmp 6 v.va- 
pog, cpdoaocpeo) im P yag ' vvv 
de cpuyw °- sa av. Lucian. 

<I>r Jh ul iv /ItXcpol o ngofictvng a , 
enetduv nlrco su ' sa 6 legog 
vafxu, evdsog evdvg yiyvo- 



fxai 



,NF . Lucian. 



XXXIII. Any verb may govern the dative in 
Greek, which has the sign to or for after it in 
English. Grammar, Rule XX. 

786. Not a galley was lost Ov Toi^gr,g unoXXvw u - 3a 6 no- 
to the state. hg. Demosth. 

787. The Volcce are near *0 Ovo)).xr,g yuxovtvo) 6 ' Po- 
to the Rhone. duvog. Strabo. 

788. The mariners tilled € vavirjg yiwgyio) im P 6 Kbq- 
the ground for the Corcyrce- xvoctlog. Xen. 

ans. 



8* 



90 



GREEK EXERCISES, 



789. These slaves are 
present, labor not thou for 
me. 

790. Each of us is not 
born for himself alone. 

791. Paul standing on the 
stairs beckoned with his hand 
to the people. 



Aovlr{ itagMfii ods, (if) ov iyw 
Eurip. 



TtOVSOJ. 



JwaoTog eyta ov% avzov fiovog 
ylyvopai m -p. Plato. 

*0 UavXog Xorrifju *■•**■* inl 
6 ava6cc&p6g S xuTaosl(of a 
6 x^Q ( § 24.) o Xaog. 
N. Test. 



a, Ei(i\ t ylyvofiaiy and ojik'^w, in the sense of l^w, 
to have, govern the dative. 

792. And where, said Cy- Kal nov, (pypl™ o Kvgog, 
rus, hast thou this wealth 1 dpi 3d P ers - 9 ov d ovrog 6 

ovala n / Xen. 

793. I by no means have 3 £yw di 7ig6g ovtog* ovdapwg 
leisure for these things. dpi o^oXtj. Plato. 

794. He promised, if they c rmoxvsopcti im P, si dux6al- 
would pass over, that the sol- vco A -°- sa , pio&ocpoga a 



diers should have pay. 



Xen. 



NF.// 



GlQaTlWTTjg. 



795. After a trophy was 'EtieI ds rgonaiov ts iottj/m *& 
raised, and Teleutias had xal 6 vUr\ ovxog 6 TsXsvTlag 
gained this victory, depart- ylyvopai F -P l , aneipi PA - sa 
ing then he cut down the 8] xotttw ™p 6 dsvdgov. 
trees. Xen. 

796. For a war we have Ilgog noXspog 3 - noXvg <pvoig 
by nature many advantages. (§ 24.) nXsovtxxripa iym 

vttcxqxw (§ 26.). Demosth. 

797. We all should perish nag av vno Xipbg * anoX- 
through hunger ; for we have Xvco M -°- sa • vjidgxw yag vvp 
now not one of the necessa- iy<a ovdslg 6 imzjdeiov. 
ries. Xen. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 91 

798. Leave me, cares, Me&lr h ui sa e'yw, cpgovzlg, ^- 



let me have nothing to do 


<5ac ne iyu d v.cti ov 


with you. 


a ^iM.3d P ers. # Anacr. 



b. Many verbs compounded with 6fiov, or with 
prepositions, often govern the dative. 

799. If you shall not El ,u?} nifxna), inlora^ai iyw a 
send, know that we shall 6 t uoXoyia inr ^ (§ 13.) o 
enter into a league with flegoyg. Herodot. 

the Persian. 

800. For neither do they Ovis yug ailrjlwy o[xo<pgovi<o, 
agree with each other, nor oi't' It* av&LoTrmi **••#" ov. 
will they longer resist you. Herodot. 

801. The body wasted c O oo\ua ov paQulvat M - im P, aD? 
not, but resisted beyond avxiyw im P ttuqu do£« a 6 
expectation the torment. TaXainiagia. Thucyd. 

802. And at break of day Kal apa og&gog (§ 8., c.) 
he falls upon the Ambraciots htmlTttxa 6 'AfmgaitiaTrjg 
yet in their beds. Xxi tv 6 ivviq. Thucyd. , 

803. They dwell in small Kara ds fiixgog nohofxa a 
cities; and the majority or/.ii» ' v.ul 6 nXuav* ngoo- 

joincd Brasidas. yo)guo^ a 6 Bguoidug. Thu- 

cyd. 

c. Verbs govern the dative, which signify to order, 
to exhort, to obey, to disobey, to reproach, to threaten, 
to be angry, to assist, to profit, to hurt, to contend, 
to serve, to approach, to meet, to follow, to pray, 
to converse, to use, to trust, to associate, to befit, 
to be like, with several others of difFerent significations. 

804. lie arch rid tin. mul- KtXtv'u)f a 6 oxlog uvani- 
titudes to sit down upon the titoj l " F - sa inl 6 yij*. N. 
ground. Test. 



92 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



805. He did as the angel 
of the Lord commanded Mm. 

806. I often exhort thee 
concerning the same things. 

807. He feared, lest some 
one of the Ionians might 
admonish the Greeks. 

808. He perished, and 
all, whoever obeyed him, 
were dispersed. 

809. He commands the 
winds, and the water, and 
they obey him. 

810. They knew that to 
obey Cyrus honorably was 
more profitable than their 
gain per month. 

811. They command them 
not to steal, not to rob, not 
to enter into a house by 
force, not to strike whom 
(it is) not just (to strike), 
not to commit adultery, not 
to disobey a magistrate. 

812. He commanded those 
who spoke before the people 
not to censure the peace. 

813. They dared to re- 
proach me, saying that I 
undertake absurd and ex- 
ceedingly foolish things. 

814. Those who wish to 



IIoii(>/ a wg ii()o<na(JG(of a avxog 

6 ayyeXog Kvgiog. N. Test. 
HoXXdxig av diaxeXevofiai txsqI 

6 avxog s . Isocr. 
dsldco f a , fir) Tig 6 "l<ovsg vno- 

tl&rjizi"-™-™ 6 "EXXtjv. 

Herodot. 

AtxoXXvco M ' sa , not nag, oaog 
nu&b) u ' im P avxog, diaoxog- 
■ nl'Cbi P A N. Test. 

c O avsfiog inixdaaoi teal 6 vdcog, 
Hal vnaxova avxog. N. 
Test. 

riyvwoxw f a xegdaXiog (§ 15.) 
U(il INF Kvgog xaXojg nzi- 
&uqx£o3 INF , rj 6 y.axa [ir)v a 
xsgdog. Xen. 

Enixdxxw avxog (xr) xXenxco, 
(xi) a(j7ia£<a, fir) fiia (§ 24.) 
slg olxia TiagirjfiL, fir) nodo) 
og (§ 20., b.) fir) dlxaiog 
(§ 15.) (slfil 7tal(o), fir) 
[XOIXEVOJ, fir) ansi&sa uqx^v. 

Xen. 

KeXsvoi f a 6 Xeya PA,a iv 6 drj- 
fiog 6 eIqi]V7] fir) imxifidto 
(§ 13.). Demosth. 

ToXfidtof* ininXr\xxia^ a iya>, 
Xiy<a a>g axonog xal Xlav 
dvorjxog tm%£iQso) ngayfia 
(§ 33., &.). Isocr. 

&i}(u iya) & ooqpog (§ 14.) 



VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



93 



reproach you will say that 
1 am wise, if even I am 
not. 

815. If we should en- 
deavour to cause thee to 
weep, greatly wouldst thou 
complain of us. 

816. You neither accuse 
him, nor think yourselves 
to be injured. 

817. They threatened the 
gate-keepers, because they 
admitted them. 

818. To me indeed, O 
men, you seem not justly to 
be angry icith this man. 

819. They were irritated 
at the Eleans, because they 

made an alliance with the 
Athenians. 

820. If he discovers that 
thou pursuedst, he will re- 
primand not only thee, but 
also me, because I suffered 
thee. 

821. She having come 
worshipped him, saying ; 
Lord, help me. 

822. You know you shall 
fight in conjunction with 
those who are willing to 
assist their allies. 



Ufa INF (§ 13.), u xal pi] 
Ufu, 6 (jovkoficti * A ' pr ai) 
6veidl£(o. Plato. 
El ye xXalco neigaco M - IIf - im P ov 
noiiw, ocpodga uv eyot pep- 
(popou ™- im P. Xen. 

Ovt iyXaXeu) avTog, ov& 
- 7\yio[iai adixew (§ 13., &.). 
Demosth. 

c O nvXwgbg aneiXeca mp , oti ov 
nagtrini fa . Herodot. 

Eyd h&vtoi, to avrjQ, ov dixcd* 
(oq ye doxeco 6 avJjQ ovxoq 
XaXenalvco. Xen. 

3 0Qyl£a"- im P 6 'HXuoq, oti, 
noiioi M ^ a t-vfifiaxlct ngog 
3 A&r)vaiog a . Xen. 

n Hv alod-avo(iai ta - sa on dioi- 
xco imp , ov oif fiovov, aXXa 
xal iyw Xoidog&o) M -^, oti 
ai) ici(o im P. Xen. 

> 'Egxo i ucu A ' FA ''" 1 ngoaxvvioi im P 
avxbg, Xiya ' Kvgiog v , 
(iori&iw iym. N. Test. 

"lOTjllt, OTI |U6T« #£/lw PA SP O 

ovfu/uaxog ugriyw {iuxo[xai 5 ^. 
Xen. 



94 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



823. Help therefore the 
law of the Greeks, trans- 
gressed by these men. 

824. He there aided the 
friendly cities, if any one 
needed any thing, and made 
war upon the Thyrians. 

825. To the people, these 
things were useful ; but to 
those who spoke, they were 
not profitable. 

826. For if I yet pleased 
men, I should not be a ser- 
vant of Christ. 

827. With former men I 
shall not be willing to con- 
tend. 

828. Observedst thou 
never also one man under- 
taking through fool-hardi- 
ness to fight a mightier 
than himself? 

829. The Corinthians on 
account of certain private 
differences made icar upon 
the Athenians. 

830. Theoclymenus. Wilt 
thou that I myself assisting 
send out the fleet 1 Helen. 
By no means ; be not a ser- 
vant to thy servants. 



U{xvrtof a -P ovv b (546) o 
EXXyv vopog vnb bds° 
TKxgaSalva) f, - FA / a . Thucyd. 

East o fjev cplXiog noXig sin- 
novate* im P, u rig t< ? (732) 
deo^m °-P r , Ovgisvg ds no- 
Xe{itw im P. Xen. 

c O fisv dijfiog, ovrog ovp- 
(f£QC0 im P (§26.)- o ds 
Xiyw * A -P r , ov XvonsXio) im P 
(§26.). Demosth. 

El yao %xl av&Qwnog ags- 
ox(ti im P, Xgiorbg doi'Xog 
ovx up tlfxi M - IN -"»i>. N. 
Test. 

Avtjq ds TtQOTSQOg eglfa ovx 
i&sXco. Horn. 

Ovtmo alo&dvo(icu sa xal sig 
ccvrjQ a di 3 aqigoovvT] S im- 
Xuqito xqsIitwv saviov 
(§ 28.) [Mxxoficu ; Xen, 

Kogiv&iog 7iols[jii(t}f a Xdiog xtc 
diayoga % svsxoc 6 'a&tj- 
vouog. Thucyd. 

O so xXvfisv og. BovXoficci. 
£vvfgyt(o avTog exntfi- 
ncu 3V ' fa aioXog ; 'EXsvy. 
Hxiotcc . fiTj dovXsva) obg 
dovXog. Eurip. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 



95 



831. They shall come 
forth, and shall serve me in 
this place. 

832. Say, from what 
country do you draw near 
to the Grecian houses ? 

833. But when he now 
approached the palace, Arta- 
banus met him in the plain. 

834. The horsemen meet 
with ambassadors travelling 
somewhither. 

835. They take five hun- 
dred beasts of burden, and 
men who followed the beasts 
of burden. 

836. If thou wilt follow 
me with the heavy-armed 
men, I will bring thee into 
the citadel. 

837. Who would pray to 
such a goddess ? who on 
account of a woman de- 
stroyed the benefactors of 
Greece. 

838. Ulysses rejoiced at 
the omen, and prayed to 
Minerva. 

839. On account of this 
I converse with thee more 
willingly than with any 
other person. 



E^iq^o^ai, xal karona) eyw 
iv o ronog oviog. N. Test. 

"lino) lM -f a -P, iit ndlog nunou. 
'EXXrp'ixbg dulfia niXafe ; 
Eurip. 

c Jlg 5 ijdrj 6 fiuol/.tiovP nXr\- 
cnu'Qoi vnp , 6 "AqjuGuvog 
vnuvio[uu im P aiTog iv 6 
ntQcov. Herodian. 

c O Ijmti'g ivTvyxtxvu) 7tqsu6sv- 
Tr t g nogsvoficu noL Xen. 

slu(j.6dv(d vno'Cvyiov re nsvia- 
y.ooioi, xal uvfrgunog bg 
txofiai™? 6 &vyog. He- 
rodot. 

Eav uxolov&eo) BV S a iyw ovv 
6 bnXiir t g, uoriyco ov eg o 
uy.oonolig. Xen. 

TotovTog &tbg rig av nqoatv- 
Xoyiui °- pr ; og yvvt\ S ovvsxa 
6 svsoyirrjg 'EXXug anoX- 
Xvu fa . Eurip. 

Xaloh) 1 '"' 7 da b oong (§24.) 

'Odvousvg, u(juo^at im P d 

3 Airi]vrj. Horn. 
"Evexoc oviog s oil r t dt(og Sictle- 

yofxuL (jluXXov i] liXXog rig. 

Plato. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



840. But if a spirit or 
angel spoke to him, let us 
not fight against God. 

841. They use the leaves, 
not the branches, nor the 
fruit. 

842. Those whom the 
king trusts, hate and make 
war upon Philip. 

843. He distrusted us 
and the Lacedemonians, but 
trusted Philip. 

844. This Democedes, 
having thus come from 
Crotona, associated with 
Polycrates. 

845. But speak thou the 
things which become sound 
doctrine. 

846. He said that a bar- 
barian marriage befitted not 
a Roman. 

847. He that wavereth 
is like a wave of the sea, 
driven with the wind, and 
tossed. 

848. Those in the ship 
having come, worshipped 
him. 

849. The citizens he ex- 
horted to be well disposed 
towards the Romans, and to 
remember the favor. 



El ds nvsvfia XaXso)^ a ambg, 
i] ayysXog, pt] Ssofia^ico sv . 
N. Test. 

Xgdo^ioii ds 6 cpvXXov, ov 6 
xXwv, ovds o xagnog. 
Theophr. 

a Og fiaaiXsvq matsixa, ovxog 
fiiasb), xal txoXs^isoj *J>IXlti- 
nog. Demosth. 

Eyot [isv, xal Aaxsdaiy,6viog 
artiaxsoi im P, (PlXwTiog ds 
TiLOTsim im P. iEschin. 

ds Ar}iioy.rfir\g ovxog, (ads ix 
Kgoxtav acpixviofiou F - Pi -P, 
HoXvxgdxrjg 6^iLXs(o^ a . He- 
rodot. 

2v ds XaXia og (§ 20., b.) 
Ttgsnoj (§ 26.) o vyial- 
vco FX ' pr didaoxuXla. N. 
Test. 

3>dox(o im P ov% agixo^oi IWF -J» r 
Pwfiawg ydpog* fidg6agog, 
Herodian. 

c O diaxglv(o u - v ^P r sXxat m * 
y.Xvdcov &dXaooa avB(ii- 

N. Test. 
c O (§ 21., c.) ds sv 6 nXolov 

sQXO i uou A - rA ' sa nQOOxvviojf" 

avxog. N. Test. 
c O noXnixbg* nagccxccXiaf* 

svvoito o c P(0[ialog, xal fivrj- 

fxovsvca o siisgyaola (§ 31.). 

Polyb. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND THE GENITIVE. 97 



XXXIV. Verbs of giving way, with fxeTs%c>, 
(i£Ta8iSco{ii, xoLvcoveco, (pdovia, and afxcpiaSrfTico, 
govern the dative of a person, with the genitive 
of a thing. Grammar, Rule XXII. 



850. Rush on, horse-train- 
ing Trojans, nor give way 
from the battle to the Ar- 
gives. 

851. The river has yielded 
to us the way into the city. 

852. They rise up to me 
now also from the seats, and 
yield the xoays. 

853. But now impart to 
me of the fillets, that I may 
crown his head. 

854. We have shared icith 
you also temples the most 
venerable, and sacrifices, and 
feasts the most splendid. 

855. They share with their 
husbands the dangers in the 
wars. 

856. Who would not envy 
thee such a lover ? 

857. They dared to con- 
tend with the Carthaginians 
about the sea. 



"Ogvvfii M , Innodafj-og Tgug, 
urjd' sl'xa) X^g^V 'Agyslog. 
Horn. 

nora^ibg iyw 7tagax(agi(o p 
6 slg 6 noXig odog. Xen. 

TnavLoTT}ui M ds iyco ijdrj xal 
xrdxog, xal odog Qlaxriui M . 
Xen. 

Nvv ds iyb) usradidufiL sa ' a 
6 Touvla, Xva dvadsco sv f a 
6 oviog (493) xscpaXrj. 
Plato. 

Mm^w P 8s ov xal Ugbv 
o oefxvog, xal -frvola, xal 
eoozi] 6 xaXog. Xen. 

Koivcovso) 6 avrjQ 6 iv 6 noXs- 
fiog xivdvvog. Diod. Sic. 

Tig ovx av cp&ovsoi °^ a ov 
TOLovTog igaoj^g ; Lucian. 

ToX[ido)f a dfi(pio6r}Tia) Kagxrj- 
doviog 6 OdXaTia. Polyb. 



9 



98 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



XXXV. 



Verbs of reminding, 



filling, empty- 
ing, depriving, delivering, prohibiting, and re- 
straining, govern the accusative and the genitive. 
Grammar. Rule XXIIL 



858. Whence therefore 
wilt thou that I begin to re- 
mind thee of agriculture 1 

859. He filled Rome with 
statues and images, in the 
Capitol and in other tem- 
ples. 

860. He loaded all the 
ships with both the slaves 
and the treasures. 

861. Without temperance 
and justice, they have filled 
the city with ports, and 
docks, and walls, and tri- 
butes, and such-like trifies. 

862. Why, O foolish wo- 
man, emptiest thou thy 
hands of these things ? 

863. By his rashness he 
not only deprived himself of 
so great a dominion, but also 
brought those who accompa- 
nied into extreme calami- 
ties. 

864. And wilt thou de- 
fraud me of this second 
corpse ? 



IJO&SV OVV {3ovX()[lOU (XQ- 

/o) M - su -/ ffl (ji/ o yewQ/la 
V7io[ii{ivr}GX(0 ; Xen. 
c O c Pcofir) 7iXrjg6cof a avdpiag 
xal uxmv, iv 6 KannwXiov 
xal ev aXXog Uqov. Hero- 
dian. 

' nXolov nag y^^il'C t (i)^ a 6 xi 
avdgdiiodov xal o /grj^a. 
Xen. 

"Avev o(x)(fQoavvi] s xal dixaio- 
avvrj s , Xtfi-rjv, xal vmgiov, 
xal rst^og, xal q>ogog, xal 
ToiovTog cpXvagla, i(i7iXrj-&to 
6 TcoXig'. Plato. 
Tlg ao (233), a! paiaiog, ods 
aog xsvou) x^Q i Eurip. 

Aia 6 avxogZ ngonhsia*, ov 
fiovov avrov anoaTEgso) f a 
rr]Xixovzog dvvaartla, aXXa. 
xal o avvaxoXov&eco FA " pr tig 
6 Eoxaxog ovjxcpOQa xa&l- 

Kal vo<j(f>l£(o eyw ode dsvTspog 
vsxgog ; Eurip. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND THE GENITIVE. 99 



865. O stranger, pity me, 
loose me from bonds. 

866. Help me, save an 
unhappy man from ruin. 

867. He delivered the city 
from so unjust and grievous 
a command. 

863. He anchored at the 
Piraeeus with a hundred and 
fifty ships, and kept the ves- 
sels from the entrance. 

869. They debarred the 
Lacedcemonians both from 
the equestrian and from the 
gymnic game. 

870. Cleomenes having 
returned from iEgina, .de- 
signed to depose Demaratus 
from the royal dignity. 



,f* 



Xvo)f a f/co deouog. 
toph. 



Aris- 



XgalauajV iyoo (§ 33., c), 
fjvoj u -f a dvadj.iuo()og urrjg 
Xvurj. Apoll. Rh. 

e O Si noXtg otncag avofjLog xal 
dsirog nooaxay^a eXzv&e- 
q6(o f a . Isocr. 

c Ooui^o) M ^ a nobg 6 Utiguievc, a 
vavg (235) nsvtrjxovTCt xal 
Ixaxbv, xal o nXolov £?'o- 
yw im P o uanXooj. Xen. 

Kh)Xvbj imp Aaxtdaiiioviog xal 
6 \mtixog xal 6 yvf.ivtxbg 
uyoov. Xen. 

KXsofisvrjg de vooxiw^ a an 
Al'yivu, ftovXevco imp 6 Ar\- 
(jidouiog navo)f a 6 3u<jiXtla. 
Herodot. 



To these add verb3 of separating, repelling, begetting, and es- 
teeming worthy. 

871. With his spear he "j;y X og (§24.) <5' aUt Tgatg 
continually repelled the Tro- d{Ji>voj im P vavg, oong 9 



jan* from the ships, whoever 
brought inextinguishable fire. 



(§ 20., e.) (jpe'ow °P r dxcina- 
70c 7ito. Horn. 



872. We pray always for nqoosv/ofiou ndvroxs mpl 
you, that God may count you 
worthy of the calling. 



ira au a^iuta 



ivja 



xX^uig 6 Oiog. N. Test. 



100 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



a. Some verbs frequently take the accusative of a 
thing, with the genitive of a person or thing from which 
it proceeds. 



873. What then wishest 
thou secondly to learn from 
me ? 

874. I should wish to. 
gratify thee, if thou shouldst 
request of me possible things. 

875. I learn the whole 
thing from a servant, who 
delivered the child. 

876. These things they 
gladly heard from him, on 
account of their then sub- 
sisting enmity towards the 
Thebans. 



Tig ne dt]Ttt povXo{j.ai dsmsgov 
fiav&dva) sa iyca / Eurip. 

BoiiXo^iai ° av xagl&pai, av d , 

si * eyco dvvaxog deopai ° . 

Plato. 
Uvv&dvofiou 6 nag Xoyog -&e- 

Q(*7t(tiv, og iyxsiQl£o) f a 6 

figeyog. Herodot. 
Ovxog d aaptvag axovco tmp 

avTog, dice 6 xo& vnsifii PA 

otTtixdsux a ngog 6 Or}6ou- 

og a . Demosth. 



XXXVI. Any transitive verb may govern the 
accusative and the dative (when, together with 
the object of the action, we express the person 
or thing with relation to which it is exerted). 
Grammar, Rule XXIV. 



877. Come hither, show 
thyself to the spectators. 

878. I will drag thee "to 
the people, that thou mayest 
give to me satisfaction. 

879. If thou speakest the 
truth, I promise to thee ten 
talents. 



Xagioj dsvgo, dsixvvco^ a aav- 
rov o &eari]g. Aristoph. 

"EXxw av ngbg 6 dfjfiog*, Xva 
dldaipi aVmSa iya> dUrj. Aris- 
toph. 

3 £av d* aXrj&svo) av f a , vnia- 
%vso{icci> av dixa xaXavxov. 
Xen. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND THE DATIVE. 101 



830. Having arisen, they 
sacrifice to Bacchus a ram 
a year old. 

881. To what shaUl liken 
the men of this generation 1 

882. Tisias often despite- 
fully throws at me the exile 
of my father. 

883. You committed to 
him country, and children, 
and wives, and yourselves. 

884. The superfiuous tents 
they delivered to Cyrus, that 
the Persians might have 
them. 

885. So that even now re- 
mains the armature, which 
Cyrus then prepared for the 
horsemen. 

836. He leaves to the vil- 
lage prefect his relatives, 
except his son just coining 
to manhood. 

887. O son of Apollodo- 
rus, how thankful to thee I 
am that thou incitedst me to 
come hither ! 

888. Not only therefore 
felicity, but likewise success, 
as it seems, does science 
impart to men in every pos- 
session and action. 



3 AvlaT7][lL PA>5a , &V(0 o Alow- 

oog xgibg iriavaiog. Lon- 

gus. 
Tig ofioioco 6 av&gamog o yz- 

vm ovrog ; N. Test. 
Tiolug noXXuxig ovsidl^co eydt 

6 cpvyrj 6 naxriQ. Isocr. 

:> EmTgen(of a avrbg nctTglg, xul 
nalg, xaX yvvi], xul ov uv- 
jog. Lysias. 

c O ds negioabg oxtjvtj Kvgog 
nagadldoiui sa , tag 6 Jlig- 
ai]g d yiyvo/uu -** (§ 33., 
a., Ex. 795.). Xen. 

"Hare xul vvv diajuivw 6 otxXl- 
atg, og tots Kvgog b Inntvg 
KttTaaxsv<x£otf a . Xen. 

c O <5' olxirTjg xuruXunoi o xm- 
(jdg%7]g, nXr\v b vlbg (277) 
Sort jj6daxw PA . Xen. 

y Jl nalg v 'AnoXXodwgog, wg 
Xugig* ov t%(o on ngo- 
igin(t}f a lyco cu<5e uyixvio- 
pm™"*. Plato. 

Ov {tovov ugu evtv^Iu, uXXot 
xul evnguylu, wg ti'xa) U P, 
b £moii]ur] nagixta b uv- 
■frgwnog iv nug xirjaig tc 
xul ngu$ig. Plato. 



U 1 



102 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



XXXVII. Verbs of doing, speaking, asking, 
taking, teaching, clothing, and concealing, gov- 
ern two accusatives, the one of a person and 
the other of a thing. Grammar, Rule XXV. 

889. What then wilt thou Tig ne di} ly<a dgdm 



do to me ? wilt thou slay my 
son ? 

890. But wherefore de- 
signs he to do us these things 1 

891. None ever did the 
Persians more injuries. 



noug 
iyoj ( § 18., b.) xaxaxtd'* 
vca & ,- Eurip. 

*Atccq duxtl ye ovtog im6ov~ 
Xsvca noi&oj iyat ; Aristoph. 

Ovdctfibg P 7rw Uigarjg xaxov 
nXelcav EQyd£opaif a . He* 
rodot. 

892. Lamachus. What Adfiaxog. Tlg nB d* snjof* 
saidst thou of us? Wilt iyd s ovx sfya ; A m a to- 
thou not tell 1 DicEopolis. n o X i g. Ovx el'da M -P . not* 
I know not yet. Aristoph. 

893. Say not of thy hus- Mr) Xiyco 6 oag dvr)o, epilog) 
band such things, dear Dione. xoiovzog, Amvr\. Theocr> 

894. If Socrates asJcs thee 3 Eav rig igwrdo) 3U ov ^wxgd- 
any thing, wilt thou answer 1 rrjg, dnoxglvofiai ; r] nag 
or how wilt thou do ? nouia ; Plato. 

895. Who is the young Tig elfxl 6 veavig ; w? 'EXXrjvi- 
Woman ? How Grecian-like nug dveoopai im P iyat 6 iv 



'fXiov novog ! xal 6 a&Xiog 
Aya^sfivav dog olxislgw im P ! 
dv£Q(OT<x(a im P re iyat yvvr)) 
naig xL Eurip. 



she ashed us about the toils 
at Troy ! and the wretched 
Agamemnon how she pitied ! 
and she inquired of me about 
his wife, and children. 

896. Desiring always to s Em&Vjjiiiti del Xafiitgog rig 
perform something splendid, ggydfyfxai, aheto 6 3 Ayr\al- 
he asks of Agesilaus heavy- Xaog ojrXlrrjg. Xen. 
armed men. 



VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 



103 



897. They loitt no longer 
demand of thee their pay, 
but will depart out of the 
country. 

898. He exacted of Lep- 
tines four and thirty 
drachms, and of Tkeoxenus 
seventy drachms, 

899. I took the island 
1 neither from them nor from 

you, but from the pirate 
Sostratus. 

900. That we may be 
more expert in warlike af- 
fairs, declare to us whence 
he began to teach thee the 
art of commanding. 

901. They teach their sons 
three things only, to ride, 
and to use the bow, and to 
speak the truth. 

90*2. They took off from 
him the cloak, and put upon 
him his garments. 

903. Diogiton concealed 
from his daughter the death 
of her husband. 



2v ds ovxixi dnaixio) b /u/- 
a&bg, alH dna)ldao(a M ex 
b yfj. Xen. 

£ y j7tgaTTto f a Atnxlvr\q xhxa- 
geg xal xqidxovxa dgaxjAr}, 
xal Osol-srog dgaxftr) e6do- 
[irjxovxa. Demosth. 

'O vrjaog ovt 3 ixsivog, ovxe ov 
a<fctiQ£(o*' sa , aXXd b Xyoxrjg 
Zwoxoaxog (§ 25.). De- 
mosth. # 

"lva imoxrjuwv b 7iole[2iy.bg 
(638) slpl 8U , Xiya /«■» 

iyo), noxrev agxb) M ^ a 
ov SiSdoxta b oxqaxr\yia. 
Xen. 

UcciSevco o ncuq xgElg fiovog, 
InnEWJ, xal xo^evco, xal 
aXtj&l^ofiai. Herodot. 

Exdva/ a avxbg b ^a/itSs, xal 
ivdv(df a avxbg b l^dxiov 
aixogS. N. Test. 

4ioydx(ov o ■&vydx7]Q xqv- 
nxo) tm P b &dvaiog b dvx\q. 
Lysias. 



a. Several other verbs are also found with two 
accusatives. 

904. But why do we blame *Axdp tig (233) ovxog b Aaxav 
the Lacedccmonians for these aixidojiai. Aristoph. 
things ? 



104 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



905. I wish to remind you 
of the words which he said ; 
for I know that you will re- 
member. 

906. From these things 
therefore I then prevented 
thee, as thou sayest. 



BovXo^lwl ds ov 6 Xoyog, oq 

Xs/(0 tm P, V7lO{llflV7j(JJt(0 f a ' 

si'dto M *P yag on fiifiv^- 
ox<o v -ff. Demosth. 

Ovrog ago, oil tots $Lomo)Xv<af a , 
ag ov cprjfil. Plato. 



b. Verbs of doing and speaking often take the adverb 
ev or xaxwg instead of the accusative of the thing. 



907. And now he benefits 
\he Messenians and the Ar- 
gives. 

908. They more willingly 
speak ill of me, than they 
praise themselves. 



Kcu vvv o Mtoariviog xcu o 
'Agyslog sv noiita. De- 
mosth. 

°Eym ijdiov aaxoitg Xsyta, q ov 
avTog eTiaivito. Lysias. 



c. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with 
the accusative neuter of an adjective in the sense of an 
adverb. 



909. He injured me great' 
ly, and hurt the state not 
a little. 

910. Not only will you not 
hurt, but even most greatly 
will you benefit the state, and 
yourselves. 



3 Eya fiev {iEyccg ne ' p £77^*00* ^ a , 
6 ds nolig ov [iixgog ne,p 
§lamo3 fa . Lysias. 

Ov fiovov ov fiXctTtTO), aXXa y.cti 
6 [isycig ne - p (oopiXsw 6 TtoXig, 
xal ov avTog. Demosth. 



d. A preposition must often be supplied before the 
accusative of the thing. 



911. He challenged not Ovx (slg) ox/Tog nqoxaXm 



u u.imp 



those who associated 
him to these things. 



with 



OVVSlfll, 



Xen. 



VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 



105 



912. The army he divided c O OTgdrevpa xatavificj^ 1 (elg) 
into twelve parts. do'idexa psgog. Xen, 

913. 1 advise to divide OvTog de o ovpfiogla exaoTog 
each of these classes into diuigs(o sa xelevm (tig) nevie 

Jive parts of twelve men pigog xara dudexa dvqg*. 
«ach. Demosth. 

6. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with 
the accusative of an adjective or substantive which ex- 
presses a quality or property attributed to the person by 
the verb. These verbs are those which signify to call 
or name, to make, to choose, and when in the passive 
take the same case after as before them. 



914. They call him, whom 
we serve, Polyphemus, 

915. JEschylus in (the 
tragedy) Prometheus Loosed 
makes the Phasis the bound- 
ary of Europe and Asia. 

916. They decreed to 
assist with all their forces, 
and they chose IpJucrates 
commander. 

917. They call insolence 
education; anarchy, liberty ; 
luxury, magnificence ; impu- 
dence, manliness. 

918. But poverty has cor- 
ruption ; it teaches a man 
through want to be bad. 



KwUco 5* aviog, og (831) 
Xazgevw, IloXvcprjpog. Eu- 
rip. 

Aloxvlog iv IJgofirj&tvg 
kva P - VA -P r o <Pa<ng ogog 
6 EvQOjnr} xal 6 'Aalet 
noieo). Arrian. 

Vqqp/^o) M, ^ a por)&d(o navdijfiel, 
xal Iyutfjarris OTQUTrjyog 
algia u - sa . Xen. 

"TOgig uev, naldevaig xaXi(o * 
avaoxla di, eXev&egla ' dow- 
xla de, peyaXongeneia ' 
dv aid eta, de, dvdgia. Plato. 

AX$ tya) vooog ntviu ' diddoxat 
y\ dvrjg 6 XQtfa (§ 24.) 
xaxog. Eurip. 



106 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



919. Many having been 
injured by orators, teach 
their sons to be orators. But 
no one having been injured 
by a wolf, becomes a wolf 
himself, and bites in return. 



JloXvg ddixiw p - PA -/ a £710 gr^- 
toiqZ , 6 vlbg gi'jiwg didd- 
ox(o ' ovdslg di adixiw PPA / fl 
VTib Xvxog s , avrbg Xvxog 
ylyvopai, xa\ dvTiddxva). 
Ariston. 



XXXVIII. When a verb in the active voice 
governs two cases, in the passive it retains the 
latter case. Grammar, Rule XXVIL 



920. When he heard,, he 
bore it grievously, consider- 
ing of what honors and of 
what hopes he had been de- 
prived. 

921. All things are con- 
spicuous in the soul, after it 
is divested of the body. 

922. They persuade the 
Athenians to send to them 
ships, for by the Syracusans 
they were kept both from the 
land and from the sea. 

923. All the other things, 
which have been thought 
worthy of this appellation, 

924. And again they ask- 
ed, for whom the horses 
were bred. 

925. He shall be likened 
to a foolish man, who built 
his house upon the sand. 



*£nsl dxovo)f a , xaXsnwg <)p«- 
ga^ a , iv&vfxiofiai, olog 
•tifirj S xou olog iXmg S ano- 
OTsgscQ. Xen. 



"jEvdqXog nag slpl (§ 26.) iv 
6 yvxt], 4nu8dv yvfivoco sv ^ a 
6 oafxa g . Plato. 

IZsl'&w 6 3 A&rjvalog nifincof* 
ov vavg, vnb ydg 2vga- 
xovaiog s o T£ yij d'gyeo im P 
xul 6 S-dXaooa. Thucyd. 

aXXog nag, oaog a£i6a> 
(§ 26.) ovxog 6 ngoogrjoig. 
Plato. 

Kal ndXw igwxdw %mp , jig* 



mnog rgeqxa 



Xen. 



O/iotow avtjQ fiojgbg, oaxig 
olxodofiia^ a 6 olxia avtov 
N. Test. 



j \ « w n r 
ent afifiog . 



CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 



107 



926. And whatever things 
he himself was ashed by 
others; he quickly answered. 

927. They demand of the 
Arcadians the cities of which 
they were deprived by the 
Lacedsemonians. 

928. O child, O son of 
my wretched son, we are 
deprived of thy life unex- 
pectedly. 

929. He was instructed in 
music by Lamprus, and in 
rhetoric by Antiphon. 

930. The majority of the 
commanders were not per- 
suaded of the things which 
were announced. 



Kul oaog avrbq vn aU.og S 
igardo} opr , xa-/v anoxgl- 
vofiac im P. Xen. 

'Anuria (§ 37., Ex. 897.) 
o nohg 6 Agxdg, og a 
vnb Aaxsdaiuoviog s acpair- 
giw r - fa . Xen. 

3 SI zixvov,, <u ncug T noug 
(loysgog, ovXdco aog ifjvxrj a 
ddoxcag. Eurip. 

Movotxt] a (uev vnb Aaungog g 
ncadevd) f a ., qijtoqmt) a 8e 
vn* 'AvTicpmv ». Plato. 

'O nXelwvV 6 aTgarrjybg ov 
nn&<o im P 6 gayyiUu »*A 

Herodot. 



a. Some verbs in the passive retain the former case, 
and the latter is made their nominative. 

931. He had had com- c O 6 dnooxBvrj inngina T * 1 
mitted to him the guard of yvXaxrj*. Polyb. 

the baggage. 

932. They are thought AUaiog 8s vou%<o, xal dia 
most just, and on account of ovTog* ntoxtvto 6 xgloig*. 
this they are intrusted wtlh Strabo. 

the trials. 

933. Read* to me under *By& d uvayiyvmaxta IM * a -» inl 
what archon he was voted tig uqxoiv s x Ft Q 0T0V ^ 10 T ^ a 
the office. 6 ugxq- iEschin. 



108 



GREEK EXERCISES, 



934. They delivered up a Eyx^Q^ m fa swtov, xccl dva- 

themselves, and having been yio p - PA -/ a ngbg (iuoiUvg % 

brought to the king, they dnoxi^iva *■& o xscpaXy*. 

had their heads cut off. Xen. 

The accusative with the passive may often be referred to narit 
understood. 



935. He was struck on 
the head with an axe in the 
Prytaneum. 

936. They drew up also 
the wretched goat broken as 
to both his horns. 



IlXyooio sa o 7t£<pt*Xri niXsxvg d 
iv 6 Ilgviavslov. Herodot. 

*Avi[id(o is '^ a di not o d&Xiog 
xgdyog ovv&gavoj r -* A -P dp- 
(pco o xegagV. Longus. 



b. Verbs passive, or of a passive signification, are 
followed by a genitive governed by vnb, dnb, in, nagd, 
or ngog. 



937. He was honored by 
you, and he possessed much 
property. 

938. We are injured, O 
women ; for we are kept 
from the sepulchre by this 
man. 

939. These things were 
said thus by the pilot to 
Xerxes. 

940. No memorable ex- 
ploit was performed by them. 

941. For these persons 
living scientifically are not 
acknowledged by thee to be 
happy. 



*Tno av Ti(jid(»} im P, xal noXvg 
ovala XTaofiou r ' pl . De- 
mosth. 

9 Adix£(o, a yvvrj ' sl'gya ydg 
rdcpogs (§38., Ex.922.) 
ngog dvrjQ ode. Eurip. 

Omog ovico g£(xJ a (§ 26.) 
ix 6 xv6egvyTTjg ngog £ig- 
%rjg a . Herodot. 

Hgdooiaf a dn avtog ovddg 
egyov d&oXoyog. Thucyd. 

Ovrog ydg irilotrjfiovag £aw 
ov% ofwXoyia) nagd ov sv- 
dal[i(ov slfii. Plato. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 



109 



942. In the debarcation I 
was slain by Hector. 

943. I learned the for- 
tunes of Agamemnon, and 
the death by which he per- 
ished by Ids wife. 

944. Whoever of you 
knows by what man he per- 
ished, him I command to 
relate all things to me. 

945. From Naxus they 
were banished by the people ; 
and having been banished 
they came to Miletus. 



Jb'v o U7z66aaig a7io&vi]ax(j} A,sa 
vnb 6 u Extwq. Lucian. 

Ayaueuvcov tv%i] enlaxauai mp , 
xal &avaxog, oiog d ngog 
dauay oXXvco *- sa . Eurip. 

"Oaxig noxe av xaxeidu M -P avrig 
ex rig dLoXXvw M,sa , ovxog a 
xeXeva nag or t uaiv(a (§ 36.) 
eyco. Soph. 

jEx Na$og cpevyw *- sa vnb 6 
drjuog ' cpevyca A - PA - 5a ^fi 
acpixv£o i uaL sa eg MlXr]xog. 
Herodot. 



c. Passive verbs are often followed by a dative, 
sometimes with, but frequently without, a preposition. 



946. Thus by Tydides 
were the close phalanxes of 
the Trojans disordered. 

947. This thing nowhere 
in the book has been said by 
me. 

948. Hear not therefore, 
nor endure the things which 
had been done either by the 
Lacedcemonians or by the 
Phoccans. 

949. They were instructed 
by us in gymnastic and in 
music somewhere in the for- 
mer discourse. 

10 



"Hg vnb TvSeidrjg nvxivbg xXo- 
vtco im P cpdXayS Towg. Horn. 

Ovxog ovdccfiov 6 (3i6Xlov S 
Xeyto iyoj. Lucian. 

Mr\ xolvvv og (§ 20., b.) 
ngdooo) ( § 26.) rj Aaxe8ai~ 
fioviog, r) (pwxevg, dxova) P, 
urjS' uvixouou. Demosth. 

rvfivaanxT] d fiev nov xal 
Hovoixri d iv ye 6 ngoa&ev 
(§21., a., Ex.544.) nai- 
3ev(o im P eyoj. Plato. 



110 



GREEK EXERCISES, 



Thus also impersonate. 

950. They were powerful 
in riches, as also it has been 
shown by the ancient poets. 

951. They are ambitious 
to show to all men that they 
have not labored in vain. 



XqtJ[xci d dvvcnbg dpi, w£ x'*2 
o naXmbg noirjTTjg drjXow. 
Thucyd. 

0Llorifiso(iai imdslxwfn, w 
ngog oniag & , otl ovx aXXoag 
ai)xbg d -v norm**- 9 . Plato. 



XXXIX. The particular part or circum- 
stance referred to after a general affirmation 
is put in the accusative. Grammar, Rule 
XLIL 



952. They were about 
equal to the Greeks in num- 
ber. 

953. He was both in ap- 
pearance most terrific, and 
most large in person. 

954. He was also other- 
wise both hospitable and 
magnificent after the Thes- 
salian fashion. 

955. Thou art like in 
body, and voice, and feet, to 
Ulysses. 

956. The fruit of the lote 
tree is in sweetness like to 
the fruit of the palm-tree. 

957. There is not a man 
who is happy in all things. 



El[il tm P naQoy,OLog 6 *EXXr\v 
( § 29.) 6 dgi&pog. Xen. 

Elfxl $s xal 6 oipig cpo6sgbg, 
xcu fxsyag 6 oafiix. Hero- 
dian. 

Elfil ds xal aXXwg q>iXo£svog 
ts xal (A8yaXo7iQ87Ttjg o Oej- 
xaXixog rgonog. Xen. 



2\) difiag, cptavri ts, novg 
ts 'Odvoosvg ( § 33 , c, 
Ex. 847.) sVxoo**. Horn. 

c O ds o Xavog xagnbg slfxl yXv- 
xvtTjg 6 cpolvi% o xaQizbg 
( § 29.) ngooslxsXog. He- 
rodot. 

Ovx slfil oozig nag avrjQ svdou- 
(xovsco. Aristoph. 



CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



Ill 



053. He hit Prothoenor on 
the right shoulder, 

959. Near the eity was a 
stone pyramid, of one hun- 
dred feet in breadth, and of 
two hundred feet in height. 

960. They expected to 
come at sun setting to vil- 
lages of the Babylonian 
country ; and in this thing 
they were not mistaken. 

961. They were admira- 
ble in beauty and in size : 
their appearance differed in 
nothing from amber. 

962. I am by nation an 
Assyrian ; I have also a 
strong castle, and I rule over 
much territory. 

963. They use gold and 
brass for all things. 



Bu/.ho sa ds JIqo&otIvcoq ds*iog 
aiuog. Horn. 

Huou 6 nolig 3 - sl/ui nvQayAg 
US-ivog, o fikv svgog elg 
nli&QOv ( § 19.), 6 ds vipog 
dvo vtid-Qov (§ 19.). Xen. 

v4oyuo<xiu imp rjitb) lXF ff u\ua 
ijhog (291) dvio) PA tig 
y.uiut] o Ba6v).b)viog ^eo^a* 
zul oviog ov ipsvdco *f a . 
Xen. 

JStfii &txi\udaiog o xdllog xal 
6 psys&oq' 6 ds oipig 
1-foy.rgovS ovdsig ne dictcps- 
Qui im P. Xen. 

£yo) sljxl 6 fisv ytvog Aoav- 
Qiog ' t%(0 ds xal xsl/og 
io%vp6g, xal x°^Q a ( § 31.) 
stkxqxu) nolvg. Xen. 

Xpvoog ds xal /aXxog o nag 
zouo/xai (841). Herodot 



XL. An impersonal verb governs the dative. 
Grammar, Rule XXVIIL 



904. And let us consider 
whether it is proper for us, 

(Jf ! Ot. 

905. But, if it seem good 
to thee, I will bear these 
words to the old man. 



Kal oxoTiio) 9 ° si s'yu) nqsnsi, 
if oil* Plato. 

3 A)l\ si doxil 1 * ov, ods dnay r 
ytl.lo) (§ 36.) Xoyog ysgwv. 
J In rip. 



112 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



966. With my hand it is 
not lawful for me to take 
hold of thy chin. 

967. It is profitable to 
Philip, and to the Phoceans, 
and to you in like manner 
all, to be freed from the 
apathy, and from the heavi- 
ness of the Thebans. 

968. For me therefore it 
is sufficient even hereafter 
to receive ; but give to these 
generals and captains, who 
followed with me. 

969. And through passion 
it was decreed by them to 
slay not only those who are 
present, but likewise all the 
Mitylenseans who are of age, 
and to enslave the children 
and women. 

970. For private persons 
it is possible to retrench their 
expenses for the things per 
day, as they please ; but for 
kings it is not possible. 

971. When they saw 
Xenophon, they run to him, 
and say, Now it is in thy 
power, O Xenophon, to be- 
come a man. 



Xelo (§ 24.) d' ovx titon iya) 
6 aog Xa^iGdvoa M - INF - sa y S - 
vstdg (738). Eurip. 

2v^(psQH ds <PlXi.7V7iog, xal 
fttoxsvg, xal ai) ofxolcog 
anag, 6 avaXyi]ala % (§38.), 
xal 6 (jaqvTrigZ dnaXXda- 

Or}6alog. Demosth. 

!fc'/w psv xolvvv doxel xal 
av&ig X(X{i6du'b) ,NF - sa • oixog 
ds o axqaxr\yog dcogsofiat 3 , 
og ovv sya) dxoXov&sw im P, 
xal Xo%ayog. Xen. 

Kal vtc oyyr) » doxsl k -f a 
avxbg ov 6 ndqsL^it PA povov 
anoxxshoa f a , aXXd xal 
o anag MLxvXrjvaiog oaog 
rjOdo), nalg ds xal yvvr) 
avSQa7iobL£(x>f a . Thucyd. 

[ihv idiwxrig s&oxi 6 dandvTj 
avpxe\uva) slg 6 nep (§ 21., c.) 
xa& Ti^isQa a , on?] ftovXo- 
fiai ' 6 ds xvqavvog ovx 
svds%sxai. Xen, 

c Slg sl'dco sa 6 jzsvocpwv, nqoani- 
Ttxoj avxbg ( § 33., b.), xal 
Xsyca, Nvv ov z&axiv, o) az- 
vocpeov, dvrjQ d ( § 14., 
Ex. 441.) ylyvojiai 1VT ' sa . 
Xen. 



CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



113 



a. Au and xgh agree with an infinitive preceded by 
the accusative. 

972. It behoves the tyrant 'Tne$ougicQ ovxog nag del 6 xv- 
to cut off all these persons, gavrog, u pitta agx® INF ^/ 
if he means to govern. (§ 12., a.). Plato. 

973. Thou shouldst net 2v 5' ov <p&oviu ygij ' [ivglog 
envy ; thou hast innumerable slfti (§ 26.) attog <jv (§ 33., 



t)ther things, in which thou 
wilt delight. 

974. After all had assem- 
bled whom it behoved (to 
assemble), and silence had 
taken place, Cyaxares spoke 
thus. 

Other impersonate likewise, which more commonly govern the 
dative, sometimes agree with an infinitive preceded by the accu- 
sative. 

975. That it becomes us 'Slg iyca ngsnet (SovXevco M adi- 
being injured to deliberate, xsca p - PA -i"", prjdelg dida- 



a., Ex. 792.), iy og d xig- 
7i(o u -ff. Eurip. 
'fig ds nag avvigyopai A,,a og 
du im P {ovvigyouav »»*•«»), 
xal oicotit] ylyvojxai sa , 
Kva^dgrjg I'no) sa <ode. Xen. 



axb) ,M ? r . Thucyd. 
Jlsgl Al'yvnxog a ovx I'^eoxt 
paodeiig ^wot? Ugaxucrj * 
ugyco. Plato. 



let no one teach. 

976. About Egypt it is 
not allowable for a king to 
rule without the sacerdotal 
science. 

977. Having made war 2igaxsvot PA ^ a tf inl 6 ftfihegog 
upon our ancestors, he suf- ngoyovog a , ndoxco 8a og 
fered the things which it was ngooi]xu im P avxbg (na- 
justfor him (to suffer.) oyw INF -* a ). Isocr. 

b. Au and pilu, with their compounds, also pixeoxt, 
nQoar'jxei, diucfiou, and HXslnet, govern the dative of 
person, with the genitive of a thing. 

978. There is need of some Kopipbg 8e xlg aoxrjoig del no- 
more elegant exercise for the hfiixbg d&Xrjxrig. Plato. 

warlike wrestlers. 

10* 



114 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



979. I consider in what 
manner I may discourse 
concerning them ; for I care 
for these, more than for the 
others. 

980. If therefore you shall 
restore these things to those 
who serve in the army, there 
is further need of no supply 
for you. If not, there is 
further need. Rather there 
is need of all the supply. 

981. It repented them of 
all the things that had been 
said, and they acknowledged 
that they mistook no thing 
ever so much. 

982. Perhaps also I shall 
put on purple raiment, that 
they may know, that / no 
longer share in those trifles. 

983. To a man overcome 
by the pleasures of the body 
there belongs no virtue. 



JZxoni(o u , Tig rgonog (§ 39., 
Ex. 954.) dicdsyofiai p - 9U ^ a 
nsgl aviog S • fieXsc yag 
iyco d ovtoq S [iaXXov, ij 
6 aXXog s. Isocr. 

El [iev oiiv ovxog o oxga- 
t£W0 m - pa anodldcofiL (§ 36.), 
ovdetg ov ngoudel nogog ' si 
ds fir), ngoodsl * paXXov ds 
anaq svdel 6 nogog. De- 
mosth. 



Mst(X[ieXei im P ds avxbg anocg 
6 igso) *•**"?, ofioXoysa im P 
ds firjde}g tigjtiots xooovxov 
ngayfiu S diafiagxavco INF - sa „ 
Isocr. 

Taxa 8s xal nogcpvglg [isxctfi- 
cpia^ofiat, (og sl'drjfu °, on, 
[xrjxsTi iyco d 6 XijgogZ sy.el- 
vog (isxsoTi. Lucian. 

Avr)g ijxxoov o dia 6 acofxa % 
rjdovr) (§ 28.) ovdelg agsxr) 2 
Ttgoorjy.SL. Xen. 

c. Sometimes del and ygr) take the accusative of a 
person with the genitive of a thing. 

984. Go rejoicing ; for I Xalgw eTfii s • ov yocg abg iydo 

dsl &soniofia. Eurip. 



have no need of thy oracles. 
985. Thou hast need of a 
long and wjse speech, with 
which thou shalt persuade 
me that thou killedst not thy 
friends. 



Maxgbg ys dsl ov, teal ooybg 
Xoyog, ooxiq ( § 24.) iyat 
7isl&(0 fir) cplXog xaxaxxsl- 
r ui*r.sa (£ 13., ft.). Eu- 

rip. 



CONSTRUCTION OP PARTICIPLES. 



115 



XLI. Participles govern the case of their 
verbs. , Grammar, Rule XXXI. 



986. The Acarnanians, 
having plundered the dead, 
and having erected trophies, 
returned to Argos. 

987. Recounting therefore 
all the dangers, I should be 
exceedingly prolix. 

988. Having heard the 
trumpet, they immediately 
rushed upward along the 
open road. 

989. The heroes, who, 
assisting Menelaus, destroy- 
ed Ilium. 

990. Having filled a gal- 
ley of fifty oars with men, 
he entered into it. 

991. These things, said 
I, it is proper to do, and at 
the same time having taken 
Ctesippus,! entered into the 
palaestra. 

992. The Athenians, hav- 
ing pursued, and having 
captured twelve ships, and 
having taken the men out of 
them, sailed away to Mo- 
lycrium ; and having erected 
a trophy at Rhium, and 



Axaovdv ds, oxvXsvh)f a 6 vs~ 
xgoqV, xal xqoixouov Xott\- 
liJ a , anoxwQEOjf - eg "Agyog. 
Thucyd. 

"Anag pev ovv e^agi&jj.s(o 6 xlv- 
dvvog, Xlav dv fiaxgoXoyeco . 
Isocr. 

Axovco f a 6 odXmy$z, n>xrv§ 
i'rjfii M,tmp dva xard 6 cpave- 
gog odog 3 -. Xen 

"Hquiqi "IXiov og dianig&(of a , 
aQrjya MeviXaog d . Theocr. 

lJevTTjy6)T£Qog nXrjgoo) f a d- 
vi)Q%, so6uhoj sa ig aviog. 
Herodot. 

Ovtoc, cp^/ul sa d iyw, %o)] 
noiso), xal una XapSavb) sa 
6 Kxr t GL7iT[oq, ngooeifii M,p 
tig u naXaloxga. Plato. 

*0 Ss A&rjVa7og, xax ad ia>y.(of a , 
xal ravg dwdexu Xap6dvoi sa t 
o xe uvtjq *£ avxbg uvai- 
(jii0 u " a , eg MoXvxgeiov 
unonXio) imp ' xal xgonulov 
'ioTT](uif a enl 6 t Plov J , xal 
juvg dvaxi&r\fxi 8a o Uooei- 



116 



GREEK EXERCISESv 



having consecrated a ship to 
Neptune, they returned to 
Naupactus. 



dwv d , ava^(OQE(a^ a eg NaV- 
ncty.tog. Thucyd. 



a. The same case is put after participles derived 
from verbs which take a nominative after them, as that 
of the participles themselves. 



993. From Cyrus, being 
a subject, no one deserted to 
the king. 

994. To him it belonged, 
being pr est or, to punish those 
who had been taken. 

995. He said that Dema- 
ratus reigned not lawfully 
over the Spartans, not being 
the son of Ariston. 

996. We came to a cer- 
tain place called The Fair 
Havens. 

997. And the land, for- 
merly called Acte, from him- 
self he named Cecropia. 



Uccga Kvqoq °, dovkog et^it, 
ovdelg aTtsifii M# ^ ngog j3aui~ 
Xevg a . Xen. 

3 £xslvog d ngoar'jxsi, imp , elfil 
OTQaTrjyog, y.oXct£<a-f a 6 ctU~ 
axoi A - FA 'P. Plut. 

0r}fxl sa Ar^iaqaxog a ov% 
inj'ovfisvojg (taaiXsvo) INF 
2naqTiaxr\g % , ovx slfxl naig 
^AqIutwv. Herodot. 

"%opi A,5a ug Tonog rig x«- 
Xsw P - PA -^ Kcdog fopfa 
N. Test, 

Kal 6 yij, ngoiegov Xiy(o F ' VA 'P r 
Av,xr\, acp eaviov Kexgonla 
ovofidC(o fa . Apollod. 



XLII. The participle is used instead of the 
infinitive after verbs of knowing, perceiving, 
showing, remembering, persevering, desisting, 
and such as signify an emotion of the mind. 
Grammar, Rule XXXIL 



998. Know that thou art 
troublesome, and soon thou 
shalt be thrust out by force. 



OxXrtfiQq i'arjfu elfil PA ' n , xai 
Ta/a u&ia p ^ /5/a (§ 24.). 
Eurip. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 



117 



999. Knowest thou not 
that I was outraged, and my 
temples. 

1000. When they discov- 
ered that they should not be 
able to prevent, they sent 
two heralds. 

1001. You perceive not 
that you are deceived, but if 
you hear me, I will very 
soon prove to you. 

1002. When I perceived 
him to be delighted, I gave 
another cup. 

1003. I found that I rose 
up with difficulty, and that 
I stretched out my legs with 
difficulty. 

1004. This trench he 
makes for a fortification, 
when he learns that Cyrus 
is approaching. 

1005. Considering I found 
that by no means otherwise 
could I do this thing. 

1006. Either show thy- 
self not to have done these 
things, or suffer punishment. 

1007. He declared that 
Demaratus neither was born 
of Ariston, nor reigned law- 
fully over Sparta. 



Ovx el'Sm "-P v6qi& p - PA / a 

eyco a-f , y.ul vabq a ifiog. 

Eurip. 
'Enti yiyvbioxoi sa ov dvva- 

[xai PA -//- n xtoXvw, 7iepmi)f a 

dvo xr t QV$. Xen. 



Ovx aladdvofiai i$ana- 
T«a) p ' PA - n , ullL eav nxovo) sa ^ a 
iyo) S , £y($ ov avxiy.a fidXa 
imSsiitvv€9» Xen. 
"l-ldco*' Pi -'f a <5' uvrog a we inai- 
ad-uvoy.au 3a syw, uXXog <5/- 
dwfii fa xvXit Eurip. 

KcxTa i uav&dvoi sa uvlarr] i UL FA ' sa ' n 
/uoyig, xui 6 oxeXog fioyig 
ixjsuvco PA / a -". Xen. 

Ovrog ds 6 Tcccpgog nonco avxl 
tgvfia, enfidrj nvv&uvoyuu 
KvQogl TiQOoelavroi PA -.P ra . 
Xen. 

2"xonsoi M tvoLoxoi imp ovdaywg 
uv uXXb)g ovrog dianoctT- 
tw M.PA./a. n> Isocr. 

"jl dtiy.vvo) f a ov noieo) FAp 
ovrog ouvrov a , ij dLxn 
vni%M. Demosth. 

Anocfa'ii'O) lmp 6 zlrifxiioajog a 
ovxb f$ Aqiaxwv ylyvo- 
jjai MPA P a ) ovis Ixvovfii- 
votg fiaodivo) rx -P r - a - 2ndq- 

n/'. Herodot. 



118 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1008. I remember that I 
received this wealth from 
Antisthenes. 

1009. If he had endured 
to be reigned over by Cleo- 
menes, and had stayed in 
Sparta, he would have reign- 
ed over Lacedaemon. 

1010. We wilt stay with 
thee, and we will endure to 
see thee, and we will bear to 
be benefited by thee. 

1011. And now I enjoin 
upon you these things, not 
to suffer the government to 
devolve again to the Medes. 

1012. Very willingly will 
I relate to thee the things 
which I continue to do, that 
thou also mayest correct me, 
if I seem to thee to do any 
thing not rightly. 

1013. I will serve Phoe- 
bus, and I will not cease to 
respect those who feed me. 

1014. With difficulty you 
were persuaded to acquit 
him, but you made him cease 
to be general. 

1015. He delighted there- 
fore rather to call me fellow- 
soldier than son. 

1016. If I had not by lot 



Mitivrjoxa) v ' p ovxog diads/o- 
[icu FA -f a ' n o nXovxog nv.q 
3 AvTia&ivt]g 3 . Lucian. 

El ds av£%o[iou sa §aau- 
Xevco *-"-J»--n vjib KXsope- 
vr\g3 , y.cu xctTay,£v(o vnp (v 
2naqxr\j ftaodtvo) %mp av 
AaxEdalfMov 3 . Herodot. 

MSVCU 7KX06C <JV d , Y.v\ 

6ga(xi FA - pr ' n ov av£%o[iou, xul 

XMOXEQEG) V7l6 OV S SV£Q/t- 

Tsoi *-**;Jw-n. Xen. 

Kal dy av d ods imoy.rjTixto, 
[xi] n£Qteldh) IyF - sa 6 rjysfio- 
via a av&ig ig Mrjdog Trsoizg- 
Xo^iai A - rA - 5a . Herodot. 

Uavv Tjdsojg av dirjyiofiai og 
iyw Tiouw PA diaxtliia, Xva 
y.txt [18t<xqqv&iii£(o 9V 'f a eyw, 
iav Tig av doxsco sv (irj xaXag 
TToiioj. Xen. 

<Pol6og d dovksvea, not ov \r\yia 
o fiooxo) PA SsQansvoj PA,n . 
Eurip. 

Mohg fxsv txeI&oj *-f a oKplrj/ji, 
OTQUxrjysa) PA,a d avxbg a 
Txavw fa . Demosth. 

XaiQCO imp ovv nal'kov ovotqu- 
riwxrjg iyw, rj vlog xa~ 
X£(o PA - n . Herodian. 

El fiTj kay%av(o sa ods 6 td&g, 



CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 



119 



obtained this place, I should 
be ashamed to be here. 

1017. He answered that 
it shall not repent them to 
obey. 



alayvvco «•'*•""? av iv&dds 



aut y 
AnonQlvo(ittv 



Xen. 

fa 



&a M - PA - d -P avrog d ov /ma- 
fiiXsL^. Xen. 



a. After a verb governing a reflective pronoun, the 
participle may agree in case either with the subject of 
the verb, or with the reflective pronoun. 



1018. He teas conscious to 
himself that he was the cause 
of the present disturbance. 

1019. He is conscious to 
himself that he desired liber- 
ty, but that he became as 
never before a slave. 



JZvyyiyvatoxw tm P eavxov d o 
TidgsifiL PA TaQtt/r) s al'xiog 
(§ 41., a.) ylyvonca™-*^-* 
Dionys. Hal. 

c JEuvtov avvtldco^'P iXEV&sglaZ 
{isv ini&vfiib) PA / a - n , dovlog 
d dig ovdsTiojTiOTS yiyvo- 
liai* xsaM . Xen. 



XLIII. When a participle is used with lav- 
Odvcoy xvy%dvco, or cpddvco, it is rendered by its 
own verb, and the verb annexed by an adverb. 
Grammar, Rule XXXIL, Obs. 2. 



1020. Cyratades unper- 
ceivedly ran away, and came 
safe to Decelea. 

1021. We unconsciously 
do the same things as those 
skilful men. 

1022. Having risen up, 
he watched lost unobserved 
by him his father might go 
out. 



c O KvyurwSag Xav&dvw sa dno- 
didQoioxaj PA - 5a , x«t dnoow- 
£w p ^ a eg Awiluu. Xen. 

Aav&dvbi 6 avxbg ixtlvog 
6 dsivog dvi)Q d (§ 29., b.) 
noiih) p \ Plato. 

Avl(JTT]/Ul A ' rA - sa , (f>v\(XTTb) tm P 

(ii) lav&uvb) * v ' sa avTog a 
a nuii)Q t^fc^o | uat ,PA -'' a . 
Xen. 



120 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1023. Unconsciously to 
himself he consumed his 
powers on irrational things. 

1024. Wherever he sup- 
ped and slept, in the camp 
he kindled not a fire by 
night, but made a light 
before the army, that no 
one might unperceivedly ap- 
proach. 

1025. By chance I sat at 
the right hand of him near 
the bed upon a certain low 
seat. 

1026. With the goods 
which we have in the mind, 
with these we acquire also 
the advantages which we 
happen to need. 

1027. And of the Greeks 
those who happened not to 
be in their ranks ran into 
their ranks, and Ariaeus (for 
he happened to be travelling 
in a chariot, because he 
had been wounded) having 
alighted put on his coat of 
mail. 

1028. Watch if any one, 
before the slaughter is com- 
pleted, comes into the house 
first. 

1029. They strove, that 



Aav&dva sa aviov a xcaava- 
Xlay.it} PA ^ a 6 dvvapig slg 
o aXoyog. Plato. 

"Onov ds dsiTivonoiib) °' pr xal 
y.cc&£vdoj°'P r , iv [isv 6 OTga- 

TOTiedoV 71VQ VVXTWQ OV 
icd(0 lmp , 71(30 ds 6 OTQUTSVfUX 

(pug Tioisoj lTnp , Xva [Ujdslg 
Xav&dvw tu,sa ngoosijM rK - sa . 
Xen. 

Tvyxava sa xd&^fiai PA iv ds&d 
avTog nagd 6 nXtvtj a inl 
%v.yLaiC,r\Xog 8 rig. Plato. 

c O dya&ov* og d (§ 20., tf.) 
s%0) iv a ipv%r], oviog d xtcco- 
[mu xou 6 ucpsXsia, og% dso- 
ycu PA Tvy/dvo). Isocr. 

Kou o T£ "EXXrjv og fir) Tvy%d- 
v(o sa iv o rd^ig U(xl PA , slg 
o id!-ig &e(d vm P } xai Agialog 
{rvyxdva %m P ydg icp afia- 

|a S TTOQSVOpCtL PA , 8 LOT * 

TLTQtoOY.bi pl ) XaTa6alv(0 PA, * a 

fragaxlfr *' im P. Xen. 



4>vXdoo(o 8 d 3 r t v rig, ngtv 

TsXsvTaoj sv 'f a cpovog, I'gxo- 

ficti APA - sa ig olxog p cp&d- 

vm 9V - sa . Eurip. 

e J.}tiXXdoficu im P, oncog <p&dva)°f a 



CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 



121 



they might seasonably assist 
the Pellenians. 

1030. Lysander leading 
the army arrived at Haliar- 
tus before Pausanias. 

1031. They no sooner ob- 
tained the preeminence, than 
they immediately formed de- 
signs against the Thebans, 
and sent out Clearchus and 
an army against the king. 



o IleV.rjvevq* {3oi]&so) p * ff . 
Xen. 

c O de yivoardooq uyoi 6 oigd- 
TEVfia (f&dvo) sa 6 nctvoa- 
rlaq a ev 6 Aliuoxoq yiyro- 
uai PA - sa . Xen. 

Ov q>&(tt>b) sa o agX?) xuts- 
X(a PA -* a , xal Or t 6iuoq d fiiv 
evfrvq im6ovXi:Vtof a , iitl Ss 
6 fiaoiXevqix KXtugxoq xal 
OTQctTid ixnsfiTio) f a . Isocr. 



a. Kvqo) is used in the same manner as rvyxavu by 
the poets. 

1032. He who happens to Blow ds iyco*, oonq ex&gbq 
be hostile will say of me upl PA xvotw, ode ' ET- 
these things : Behold him <5co M - IM - Sa - 8 b aloxgwq J«'w PA , 
who lives basely, who durst oq ov tXt^il sa dvyoxw 1NF - sa . 
not die. Eurip. 

XLIV. Participles often form a periphrasis 
with Etui, yiyvouou, vitdgxa, s%(0, rjxa, to ex- 
press the verb either in the tense of which they 
are participles, or in that of the verb annexed. 
Gi-ammar, Rule XXXIL, Obs. 3. 

1033. And the stars of Kul b duiyo b ovourbq Hfu f/ 
heaven shall futl. ixnlnro) PA -P r . N. Test. 

1034. Going about in the Kara b uyonu* nB^lufu Tk,a , 
forum, he durst spread im- uo-t6i]q xal durbq Xoyoq 



11 



122 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



pious and false reports con- 
cerning me ; that I have 
done this thing. 

1035. I had first told 
them for what things they 
had assembled, the oration 
had been read, and it had 
been praised, and applauded. 

1036. I beseech thee by 
thy child and by the gods, 
do not betray us. 

1037. For he was not an 
enemy, nor did he this thing 
through insolence. 

1038. From one toil I 
freed thee. For crossing 
these Scamandrian streams, 
I bathed the . corpse, and 
washed the wounds. 

1039. Who pray is the 
woman whom thou bringest ? 



imp 



TiEQi iyoi S )Jyto 



pr 



)l[iat 



cog eyco o n^ay^a £/ ( iu 
dgciio VA -P ovvog. Demosth. 



slfil tmp , avayiyvcoay.co pl d ' 
6 Xoyog, sTiaivsto *•**■•? <5' 
sl[il im P, xal &oQv6ico*' 1 '^P. 
Isocr. 

2v Tigbg 6 abg xixvov s , xal 
■&sog ixviofiai, ^itj ngodldco- 
(xi PA - sa iycb yiyvopcu sv ' sa . 

Soph. 

Ov yeiq ex&gog ys vnaQ/co im P 
d[xl* A , ovd scp' vfigig d 
ovrog noUcof*. Demosth. 

JEig [io%d-og s ov dnaXXdo- 
oto PA --^ a E%co pr . SxaiidvoQiog 
ydo bds dianegdco Qorj, 
kovo)f a vsxQog, Y.cu dnovi- 
mca^ 1 TQavjAa. Eurip. 

Tig 6 yvvrj dijTcc slid og ^'xw^ 
ay to PA f Soph. 



a. Frequently also instead of a simple verb in 
the sense of to go away, oV%opai with the participle is 
used. 



1040. And having mount- Kal dva6alva PA ' sa inl 6 tn- 

ed upon their horses, they nog*, oXxoimi im P dneXav- 

rode away into their own vco FA elg o sccvtov otqcxto- 

camp. ntdov. Xen. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 



123 



h. The participle of the future is used to express 
the purpose of an action. 

1041. He sends the cap- 
tains to bring oyer the heavy- 
armed men. 

1042. When Cotys was *End ds Koxvg piXleP* inapt, 

about to depart, he came to 
Agesilaus to take leave. 



c O ).o/ayog TisuTib) diu6i6d- 
±o) p± Sf 6 onXlrr,;. Xen. 



1043. Struck with aston- 
ishment, we drove the flocks 
to the summits, lest some 
one of the Argives might 
come to plunder, and to lay 
waste thy folds. 



toxouui A - sa ttoo; o Ayr r 
oticcog 3, aanu^ouai PA -^. 
Xen. 

Ouu6og (§24.) d° haAqo- 
aw p - PA - sa , tfj/u im P ttoluvt] eg 
uy.oa, fit] rig Agyuog fio- 
Af'w 9U - sa Inflate* ™-H, wi 
abg Tiog&soj PA ^ oxa&^iog. 
Eurip. 



c. The participle is often joined with the adverb 
fUia$i), in whatever case the construction requires, in the 
sense of the Latin gerund in dum. 

1044. I thought while °Ev&v t u£opai p/a de pna^u 
writing how fortunately all 
things have happened to 
thee. 



you.(fOi , ojg svivxag unag 
ov ovu6alv(oP ( § 26.). 
Isocr. 



1045. Who is such a 
physician, who recommends 
nothing to one who is sick 
while he is ill? 



Tig elul joiovxog lujQog oong 
6 rooib) Fx [istuJ-v «(/#€- 
vita PA,d fir,ds}g avfi6ovXivw 
(§36.) iEschin. 



XL V. A substantive and participle are put ab- 
solute in the genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXIII. 

1046. They "preached Kr^voota^ navxuxov, b Kv- 
everywhere, the Lord coop- Qiog ovrenyio}. N. Test. 
crating. 



124 GREEK EXERCISES. 

1047. Neptune having JJoosiduv smcpaivoi p - PA - sa , b 
appeared, the Satyr fled. Haivqog cpsvyco sa . Apol.od. 

1048. Cimon having died, Klpuv ds uTto&vrjaxa PA,sa xal 
and a famine having arisen, lipbg yiyvopai PA,sa , a-jicxw- 
they withdrew from Citium. qko fa anb Klnov. Thucyd. 

1049. But when thou doest 2v ds tiolsco PA sksrjfxoGmi] 3 , 
alms, let not thy left hand ^ yiyvcoaxw lM - t - sa 6 cioi- 
know what thy right hand artya av (§18., 6.) jlg n0 
doeth. noiico 6 ds^ia av. N. Test. 

1050. The plain becomes c O nsdiov nsXayog yiyvo^ai, 
a sea, the river flowing in, ivdldwfu p,sv 6 itora^bg, l^w 
and having nowhere an out- ds ovda t u7] i^rjXvaig. He- 
let, rodot. 

1051. The temple of Juno c O vscag 6 "Hqa iv "Aqyog xaxa- 
at Argos was burnt down, xalca F S a , Xgvolg 6 Isgsict 
Chry sis the priestess having (§25.) Xv^vog jig rl&rj- 
placed a lighted candle by p FA,sa amu P - PA - p nqbg 
the garlands, and thereupon 6 Grippa a , xal smxaxa- 
f alien asleep. dag&s(a^- sa . Thucyd. 

• 1052. At length spring "h5t] ds jo ao/co mpa > xat ° P* v 

setting in, and the snow being xmv Xva> PPA , o 6s yij yv- 

dissolved, the earth being laid fivoco P - PA , xal o nou vnuv- 

bare, and the grass shooting d-su A,PA , o vo^svg ayta imp 

out, the shepherds drove 6 ay sir] slg vo^. Longus. 
their flocks to pasture. 

a. The genitive of the substantive or a pronoun is 
often understood. 

1053. They consulted the *Ev /lsXcpol b &sbg insgo^iai imp ' 

god at Delphi ; and he order- xsXsvm vjl ds, ix7iifx7i(a^ a 

ing, they sent out the inhab- b olxrjiwQ. Thucyd. 
itants. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 



125 



1054. Socrates command- r O Zwxouirig xeXEvoi fa 6 ngwrog 
ed to read the first hypothesis vno&saig 6 nqoiiog Xoyog 
of the first discourse, and it 
[the hypothesis] having been 
read, How, said he, sayest 
thou this thing ? 



uvayiyvwaxta ,:>r - JU , xui ara- 
yiyvwuxa) p - PA -/ fl , JJtog, cpr\- 
n\ im P, ovrogUyw; Plato. 



b. Sometimes the rest of the sentence may be con- 
sidered as supplying the place of the substantive. 

1055. Although it is haz- Kulntq imxivduvog nag* fyw d 

Ufil PA tig Muxsdovloc nifinco 
emoTO/.i), o/uojg yqa(p<i)f a 
Ttgog ov a aloeo) M-sa negl 
zliodoiog s . Isocr. 
Srmuivta "*/«-g-P 8s o Uotv- 
ayvg, bit 7ioXs\uiog elul iv 
o x ix) Q a > ix6orj&i(o ngog 
6 ogiov a ovv 6 ( § 21., c.) 
negl aviog a . Xen. 



ardous with us to send a let- 
ter into Macedonia, never- 
theless I resolved to write to 
thee concerning Diodotus. 

1056. Word having been 
brought to Astyages, that 
enemies are in the country, 
he goes out for the purpose 
of succouring to the frontiers 
with those about him. 



c. Nominatives and accusatives absolute are also 
used, and sometimes datives. 

1057. The calamity was Aiyw imp 6 avficpogd, xal 6 ot~ 
told, and the wailing passed ^>yh ix 6 Ilagauvg did 

6 fiuxgog TH/og s eg ocoxv 



dujxb) imp , 6 tTeoog a 6 !'i«- 
gog d nugayyiXXoi VK ' n . Xen. 



from the Piraeeus through 
the long walls into the city, 
one person conveying the 
neios to another. 

1058. They being kept Ei'gy(o r ' PA avj6g d o &aXao~ 
from the sea, and being r<tv- octB, x «t xuxu yrj* nog- 

Oged by land, certain per- &im*' 9A t iyx*H?%*>* *h 
sons endeavoured to deliver 7roo,- 'A&ipctiof* uyo) 3a 
the city to the Athenians. 6 noXi:. Thucyd. 

11* 



126 



»REEK EXERCISES. 



d. The absolute case of participles from impersonal 
verbs is always the nominative. 

1059. When it is in his "Msoxl PA,ae ds ga&vfisoo, (iov- 



power to live at ease, he 
chooses to labor. 

1060. They said that he 
having received bribes, took 
not Argos, when it was in 
his power easily to take it. 

1061. He does evil things, 
knowing that they are evil, 
when it is not necessary to 
do them. 



Xo{lCt 



I 71OVS0J. 



Xen. 



0tjfxl M - sa avxbg a dwgodo 

X80) FA 'f a , OV% aiQEOt INF-S 
6 "AQ/Og, 7l(XQ80Tl FA ' nQ 

nsxcog avxbg algsoj l 
Herodot. 



sv- 

NF.sa 



Ugaxxco xaxog, ytyvooaxta oil 
xaxbg sipl (§ 26.), ov 
dsl PA - ao avxbg ngaxxa. 
Plato. 



1062. It having seemed Aoxsl PA -/ ffl - ne ds iya> d ht nog- 
good to us to go forward still gooxagoo ngosgxofiai A - INF - sa , 
further, we were seized. £vXXa[i6dvoj P A Lucian. 

e. The particles <ag, ooonsg, &tc. are often put with 
absolute cases, for the most part in order to express a 
reason. 

1063. He sent word to AyysXX(o fa Evgvpsdcav d nag- 
Eurymedon to be present, si^ii, cog 6 ^co^'ov tuvdv- 



as the place was in danger. 

1064. They deserted the 
city, as also the goddess had 
abandoned the citadel. 



v£vco* A -P r . Thucyd. 

ExXsina sa 6 noXig, cog xal 
6 &sog anoluTKo M « PA -i' o 
dxgonoXig. Herodot. 



1065. As their companions "Axe &sdo[iou FA - o exatgog, 
were spectators, much emu- noXvg cpiXovuxla ylyvo- 



lation arose. 

1066. He pleaded not in 
his own defence, for he was 
unable, as his thigh teas pu- 
trefying. 



[taL im P. Xen. 

Ovx dnoXoysoficu imp , slfil ydg 
advvaxog, waxs g^tko m - pa, F" 
6 i^rjgog. Herodot. 



THE INFINITIVE DENOTING PURPOSE. 



127 



10C7. The she-goats, as 
if a wolf were approach- 
ing, fled for refuge into the 
wood. 

1063. They think to gain 
applause if they speak evil 
of him, as if all men knew 
not. 

1069. They restrain their 
sons from bad men, as the 
intercourse of the good is 
the practice of virtue, but 
that of the bad, the destruc- 
tion. 

1070. We lie down, as 
if it were allowable to have 
repose. 

1071. I have said these 
words, not as if it were 
necessary for us now to do 
these things. 



C at£, GJG71SQ XVXOQ TtQOOU- 
(.11 PA " sa , (u 6 VAT] XCCTUCpSV- 

yco sa . Longus. 

Oi'ofAou Evdoxipeio IWF «#" jjy 
ntgl avzbg" filuocpijfiew 9T5 ^ a , 
owns q ov nag a-p tl'doi MPA -P. 
Isocr. 

°0 vlsvg ugyw anb b novr^bg 
Itr&Qtonog, a>g 6 per b xgr)~ 
UTog b [A ilia a cioxrjOLg a 
(§ 41., a.) e^ui Pi b aQSTtj, 
o a,f 8e 6 7iovr t qbg, xaTctkv- 
oig* (§41., a.). Xen. 

KUTUXEIIJOU, (x)OTT£Q t$S(JTl PA - n - ne 

T)av%la j^oj. Xen. 

Oi'Tog f'of'w P b Xoyog, oi'x o>$ 
du PA - n - no ipa a i'fdrj oviog 
tiqutto). Isocr. 



XLVI. The infinitive is often used to de- 
note the purpose of an action. Grammar, 
Rule XXIX., Obs. 1. 



1072. He was sent to sa- ffipnu p ^ a xtvw^ a b Zevg xara 
crifiee to Jupiter agreeably fiavtela* rig. Xen. 

to a certain oracular re- 
sponse. 

1073. There comcth a "jy^oiuu yvrt, t'x b ^uuupnet 
woman of Samaria to draw arjltui fa vSion. N. Test, 
water. 



128 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1074. I deliver to you 
this boy to take care of. 

1075. And he sent them 
to preach the kingdom of 
God, and to heal those who 
were sick. 

1076. He gives a decree 
to the clerk to read, longer 
than the Iliad, and vainer 
than the orations which he 
is accustomed to deliver. 



HaQCtdldcafii, av 6 ncclg oviool 
snt[isUo[iai p ^ a . Demosth. 

Kal a7ioaTsXl(o^ a avzbg xr\gva- 
oca o fiaodela 6 Osbg, xat 
laoficu 6 aa&svm PA, ? r . 
N. Test. 

/Hd(ti[iL avayiyvcoaxo) sa yr\- 
cpiO[xa o yga[i[iaTSvg, [laxgbg 
[isv 6 'lltag (§ 28.), xsvbg ds 
6 Xoyog (§28.), off e#eo M * 
Xsyca. iEschin. 



a. The infinitive is governed by adjectives express- 
ing fitness, ability, or quality. 



1077. Your natures are 
hard to govern. 

1078. The agricultural 
art is most easy to learn. 

1079. The enemies were 
not able to expel us. 

1080. Thou thinkest to 
prove to the Athenians that 
thou art worthy to be hon- 
ored. 

1081. They were ready 
to go to arms, and they 
threatened Theramenes and 
those with him. 

1082. They turn false 
informers, if they are able 
to speak, and give false tes- 
timony, and take bribes. 



XaXsnbg (si/xl) 6 Vfiirsgog q>v- 

aig uQXb) fa . Thucyd. 
c O ysoigyixbg rix vr \ Q(*5iog slfil 

[lav&dva sa . Xen. 
c O noXi[iiog ovx slfil ixavbg 

sy<a O-sXavvco. Xen. 
c Hy£o[icu ivdsixvvat M - INF -/ ffl 

3 A&r)Vouog, otl a^iog si [it 

Tipdm*' 1 "'. Plato. 

"Etoifiog slfil eg 6 onXov i'rjfiL, 
xal 6 Origa[iiv7jg d xal 
o d [1st 3 avzbg s a7iaXi(>) tmp . 
Thucyd. 

2?vxo<pccvTE(o, iav dvvarbg 
slfil so Xsyta, xal ipsvdo- 
(iccqtvqeco, xal dojgodoxia* 
Plato. 



THE INFINITIVE PUT FOR OTHER MODES. 



129 



10S3. To me indeed they 
seem to be unable to be 
taught to attend more to 
any other thing, than to 
this. 

1084. They advised him, 
saying, that there was not 
a place more convenient to 
encamp in than that. 



"£yojye to* dox&co u8vvatog riy.1 
diduox(ti f f a u).log ug fiullov 
imiAtkeofiai (719), rj ov- 
Tog s (352). Xen. 

2v^l6ovIevo} imp avxbg d , Xtyco, 
b)g ovx tipl xojpog (til- 
rrjdeiog ivojqaxo7ii8tvo^ai 
ixuvog (§28.). Herodot. 



6. The infinitive is often put for other modes with 
wg, wars, nqlv, nuQog, insl, insidrj, ct/gi, [isxqi, and ears, 
going before it. 

1085. They prefer to pay 
money, 50 as not to serve as 
horsemen. 

1086. The army was sent, 
as it seems to me, for the 
subjugation of the Libyans. 

1087. He proceeded to 
such a pitch of outrage, that 
the father of the damsel jlcd 
to the camp. 

1088. They take care 
that the citizens shall not 
be such, as to desire any 
evil or shameful thing. 

1089. They made much 
noise calling one another, 
so thai even the enemies 
heard. 



E&iXa TeXeu aoyvoiov, (ag (it) 
Inntva). Xen. 

^Anonifinat tm P 8s 6 otquuoc, 
cog iya) doxia, inl AiSvg 
xaTaoTQocprj d . Herodot. 

JBlg jooovTog ne ngoxwoico f a 
v6pig (§ 23.), wg 6 nairjQ a 
6 x6qt) (p£vyoi 1VF ' sa (§ 13.) 
rig 6 OTQazontdor. Hero- 
dian. 

Eni^ieXo^iai onag (j.tj roiovrog 
rifil ff 6 7ioXliT]g, wots 
nov7]Qog rig i'pyov rj uioxQog 
icfir^t M (726) . Xen. 

Kpuvyrj noXvg noito) im P xaXsoj 
aXXrjXtov, o)urf y.ul o noXi- 
fiiog a uxovio l "'-P r (§ 13.). 
Xen. 



130 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1090. But an earthquake 
having happened, before any 
thing was settled, the assem- 
bly was adjourned. 

1091. Before he sent the 
army, he despatched to 
Barce a herald. 

1092. But behind he trod 
in his steps with his feet, 
before the dust was spread 
around. 

1093. They praised until 
I even blushed, lest haply 
I might be very much short 
of the merit of the praises. 

1094. If the hare should 
run by the nets, it is neces- 
sary to pursue him, until he 
is taken spent with fatigue. 



^eio^ibg g (§ 45.) ds ylyvo- 
f,u/.L FA,sa , tcqIv rig enixv- 
gow v - l **-f a , o txxXr t ala ava- 
6<xllu*-f a . Thucyd. 

JTIglv ds 7/ anoinsXlw INF ^" a 

6 Bdgxrj xr]gv$. Herodot. 
Avrdg omo&ev Y/viov a rv- 
nroj imp novg d , ndgog xo- 
vig a anyi X v(ti v -™*-f a (§ 13.). 
Horn. 

^Enaivsta imp u%gi nov xcu igv- 
-frgtdca INF iyw a , [it] aga 
TidfinoXv 6 a^la g 6 %naivog 
dnolunbi M -°^ r . Lucian. 

El 6 Xayag nagaTgf%(o °' sa 
6 ugxvg, XQ'h /*?*«#£« avrbg, 
ears aXlax(o A ' 1NF ' sa anayo- 
qbvoj A,PA 
Arrian. 



c. The infinitive is put after olog and b'oog for wois, 
and ecp co or icp cots for inl tovtm aoxs. 

1095. He was such a Toioviog tlftl, olog pr] fiovlo- 
man as not to wish to put to [icu nolvg dnoxrlvvvfii 6 
death many of the citizens. nollrrjg. Xen. 

1096. If thou hast met El rig evivyxdvw p 2rmxbg d 
with any such Stoic, as nei- roiovrog, olog d (xijrs Xvnsca, 
ther to be grieved, nor to be write vcp r,8ovh s xcxraondco. 
drawn by pleasure. 

1097. He rested so long, 
as both to sacrifice and to 
address the people. 



fir t rs icp rjdovr) 
Lucian. 

Tooovtov avanavoi' M - imp , ooov 
xallugiw^ a rk xal 6 drjfxog p 



Tigooenca 



Herodian. 



THE INFINITIVE PUT AFTER ofoc, 0O0g f &-C. 



131 



1098. They reported to 
Cyrus, that there were so 
many good things within, as 
during a generation of men 
would not fail. 

1099. He agreed to share 
in the common alliance, on 
condition that he should re- 
ceive twenty talents. 

1100. They said that they 
would not give up the dead, 
unless on condition that they 
[the enemy] should depart. 



AnuyysX/.ca %W P 6 Kvgog, on 

joaovzog huI ° (§ 26.) 

Xv5ov uyudbr, baog ne ' p in' 

■ av&Qunog ysvw* fir) v.v 

(381) irtdelmo '«*. Xen. 

SvrtMhifu u - sa fisrs^co "'-■ff 
6 y.oirog ovuua/la =, f<p w 
Xa l u6ur(x) lyF sVxoat to.~lv.vtoy. 
Polyb. 

L.71W sa OTl OVX (XV UTlOOlOCO- 

fu°- aa 6 vey.Qog, tl urj icf co 
re u7iHj.ii lyy - sa . Xen. 



The abbreviated expressions oToj tifu and olo$ r up) are more 
common, the former of which usually signifies to be wont, and the 
latter, to be able. 



1101. I meet with many, 
who are not able to explore 
me. 

1102. The gnats on ac- 
count of the winds are not 
able to fly high. 

1103. They made the 
tongue such as both to ar- 
ticulate the voice, and to 
signify all things to each 
other, which we wish. 



Uo/.vg u fvxvyzuvG), og eyio ov/ 
oiog T€ si fit (3ao~avl£b). 
Plato. 

c O y.o')va)ip vnb 6 iivsuog s ov% 
olog re el fit vipov nsTOfiui. 
Herodot. 

O y't.bma noiso) f a oiog a-f 

UQ&QOIO T£ O (pOiVTj, X«t 

orjfiuivca nag u).).T)).a}v, og 
fiovXoftat. Xen. 



d. The infinitive is often used for the imperative, 
particularly by the poets. 

1104. Do thou make war 2v ds 4ym 6 Inl o !E3Uof« 



upon Greece for me 



uTQctTfvoj M . Herodot. 



132 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1105. Nor stay thou, lest 
some one either hit or smite 
thee. 

1106. Be thou not eager 
without me to fight the Tro- 
jans. 

1107. When thou gettest 
him, endeavour that he no 
more shall come among the 
Greeks. 

1108. O stranger, tell the 
Lacedaemonians, that we lie 
here obeying their com- 
mands. 



Mrjds ah dq&vpw, y.i) tig av 
i] 8alX(o 3V ' sa , ij eXavrb) su ^ a . 
Horn. 

Mr) ov ys avev&sv tycoS 
hXalofiai 7ioXt[xl£(o Tgotg d . 
Horn. 

Enuv ds avrog 7if.QiXa[i6u- 
vca ' v - sa t noiiw, onrog jurjxht 
eg "EXXrp d<j>ixvso[iai. He- 
rodot. 

\fl !-svog v , dyyiXXco Aaxtbai- 
[i6viog d , OTL Tijds XslfttXL 



sxstvog 



Q1JIH 



&g> M.FA.?r # Epigr. ap. He- 
rodot. 



XL VII. The infinitive with the neuter article 
prefixed is used as a substantive in all the cases. 
Gh'ammar, Rule XXX. 



1109. Doing evil to men 
differs in nothing from in- 
juring. 

1110. To honor is often 
more glorious than to be 
honored. 

1111. Instead of saluting 
each other, they kiss with 
their mouths. 

1112. Through a desire 
of hearing your wisdom, I 
will venture to extemporize. 



O xaxwg Ttoiica uv^gcanog a 
6S ^8ixi(o oidtlg™ (961) 
diacpsQco. Plato. 

e O g Ti^aio 6 Ti^dco noXXdxig 
slfjusvdo$og ne . Plut. 



Avxi o TTQOocxyogevG) aXXr]- 
Xiav a , cpiXiw 6 oto^cc d . 
Herodot. 

1 Tito TiQO&vfilci % 6 axova)f a 
6 vfihsgog aocpla S, ToXfidm 
avTOOxedia£(o f a . 



THE INFINITIVE USED AS A SUBSTANTIVE. 



133 



1113. They commanded 
these things, that they might 
not break the peace. 

1114. I was necessitated 
to pursue, since I saw us 
suffering grievously in re- 
maining. 

1115. When will these 
obey the magistrates, who 
even glory in contemning the 
magistrates 1 

1116. I will not betray 
thee, but I will defend with 
what things I am able : and 
I am able by good-will and 
by encouraging. 

1117. On assuming the 
government, immediately he 
began warlike enterprises. 

1118. We sailed under 
Cyprus, because the winds 
were contrary. 

1119. We spend the time 
of acting in preparing our- 
selves. 

1 120. After accomplish- 
ing all things, which he 
wished, he killed them. 

1121. But call thou not 
contradicting reviling ; for 
reviling is something differ- 
ent. 

12 



Tlgoiniti sa 8s ovxoq, 6 g fit] Xva 
I'nxu 6 aJiovdtj p . Thu- 
cyd. 

'Avayxd'Qco *S a diiaxu, insl 
ogdco im P iyta iv 6 fiiva 
xaxug ndo%b)» Xen. 

ZZots de ovxoq nelOo) u ^ 
6 agxwv d , bg xal uydXXa M 
inl 6 d xajacpgoviw 6 dg- 
%bjv s • Xen. 

2v ov 7tgodidoijj.i, aXX d^ivvta 
bg d dvva/Attt, ' dvvafxac de 
svvoia d re xal 6 d naga- 
xsXnxo u . Plato. 

"A[4<x 6 d 6 ag%r} nagaXu(x6d~ 

VQ) Sa , ZV&lbig TloXEfXLXOC I'g- 

yovS dgx(o M ^ a . Herodian. 

c T7i07vXib)f a 6 Kv7iQog a , did 
6*6 uvspog a slpl ivavilog. 
N. Test. 

o nodTTh) xqovog tig 6 
7iagaoxsvd£(o M avaXioxta. 
Demosth. 

Mnd 6 xaT0Q&6u)f a nag, bg 
flovXofictt xm P, dvatgio) sa av- 
jog. Herodian. 

AXXd ov o uvTiXi/tx) /j,tj xuXiw 
Xoidogsh) u ' iTtgog yug ug 
tlul 6 XoiSogiu) M . Plato. 



134 



GREEK EXERCISES. 






1122. He said that to 
enrich was more princely 
than to be rich. 



s nXovTsa Xiy<o im P 6 nXov- 
t/£w tifil INF ^aadiy.og ne . 
Plut. 






a. The infinitive is frequently governed by IVsxa 
understood. 



1123. And he went in 
to tarry with them. 

1124. Nevertheless he 
continually sent out horse- 
men, that scouts might not 
injure the fields. 



Keel sla&QXoiuu *" sa 6 s [leva f a 
avv avxog. N. Test. 

'imrsvg fAsvioi sx7ti(X7i(o im P asl, 
6 s fX7] nQodgofxog a 6 ayqog 
xcexovgysoj. Thucyd. 



b. The infinitive takes before it the same case as the 
preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same per- 
son. Grammar, Rule IV., Exc. 

This rule obtains also, when the infinitive is preceded 
by the article to, or by the particle wots. Ibid., Obs. 3. 



1125. He so cultivates the 
earth, as to be injured in cul- 
tivating. 

1126. They were so train- 
ed to fortitude, as alone to 
conquer fighting. 

1127. Formerly we strove 
in order to rule others, but 
now in order not to do our- 
selves that which is com- 
manded. 



Ovrcag igyufyficu 6 yrj, acts 

Xen. 

Hgbg avdolct* ovtco Twudsvwf' 1 , 
wots fiovog VlJtCtb) [MX%0- 

fiai PA -? r . Isocr. 

JlQOTEQOV (XSV V71SQ O % 6 aX- 

Xog % ao%(o ayavlfyfiou %m P, 

VVvl ds V71SQ 6 S fJ.T] 71018(0 
(XVTOg 6 TtQOOTUTTCO p - PA -2> r - ne . 

Isocr. 



SUBSTANTIVES COUPLED BY A CONJUNCTION. 135 

I 

XL VIII. Substantives singular connected by 
a copulative conjunction have an adjective, verb, 
or relative plural. Grammar, Rule VII. 

1128. Xenias and JPasion, Ssviag y.ul Jlaalmv, ip- 

having entered into a ship, 6uh(a Fi - sa slg nXoiov, a,no- 

sailed away, ntiojf". Xen. 

1 129. Eteocles and Po- Eisoy.Xr,g y.al nolvrsi'xrjg Tieyl 
lynices engage in single com- 6 fiuodsla s povo^a^tco, y.ul 
bat for the royalty, and kill xthVco aXh]l(av. Apollod. 
each other. 

1130. They all came not, °0 ds nag fisv ovx %o,uca Asa , 
but Arimus and Artaozus 'jgiaiog ds y.al 'jlQzdo^og 
and Mithridates, icho were y.al Mi&QidaTrjg, og dpi 
most faithful to Cyrus. Kvgog d mozog. Xen. 

a. If the substantives be of different persons, the 
verb plural must agree with the first person rather than 
the second, and with the second rather than the third. 

1131. Thy father and I Q nuxr t Q oi) ° y.al iym odv- 
sorrowing iccre seeking thee. vuu M - PA fyiiw im P av. N. 

Test. 

1132. I and you to ill beg *Eyoi y.al ov diopai uvzugS 
of him not to destroy the pr) diueptislgw 6 ovrovala. 
conversation. Plato. 

b. If the substantives are of different genders, the 
adjective or relative plural must agree with the mascu- 
line rather than the feminine or neuter. 

1133. He approaches ngeattfu o dunw/oquxptigi y.al 

Dionysophanes and Clcaris- 6 KfoaQioTrj*, uadypm iv 
ta, sitting in the garden. 6 Ttagadfiaog. Longus. 



136 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1134. Agrippck the king ^Ayglnnag 6 (taoiUvq xal Bsq- 
and Bernice came to Csesa- vlxt] xaxavrdoi f a slg Kai- 



rea, to salute Festus. 



(§ 44., 6.) 
N. Test. 



PA.// 

<X>fj<jTog. 



c: If the substantives signify things without life, the 
adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter 
gender. 



1135. They say that na- 
ture and law are contrary. 

1136. We have much 
pitch and tar, which quickly 
raise a great flame. 



Evavxlog upl INF q>vaig a xal 
vofxog a cprjfil. Aristot. 

HoXvg nhxa xal oivnnuov 
fya, og ta%v nagaxaXsv 
(§ 26.) noXvg yXo!;. Xen. 



d. The adjective or verb frequently agrees with one 
of the substantives, mostly with the nearest, and is un- 
derstood to the rest. 



1137. Claps of thunder 
and flashes of lightning and 
a long night overtook them. 

1138. Seven months and 
a year having passed al- 
ready, Darius was indignant. 

1139. They say that it 
behoves one to be just, that 
to him being reputed to be 
just may arise from the repu- 
tation magistracies and mar- 
riages, and whatever things 
Glauco enumerated just now. 



Bqovit] 8s xal aarqanri xal vvl 
fiaxgog xaraXafi6dv(o tm P 
aviog. Chariton. 

jEjrra ds i^tjv xal iviavzbg & 8i- 
iqXo^iai u ' VK 'P ydr}, 6 /laguog 
aaxdXX(o im P. Herodot. 

Asyta tag %gr] dlxaiog* dpi, 
Xva doxsco A ' FA - d dlxaiog d 
(§14., Ex.441.) slfil yi- 
yvo\iai su duo 6 <5o|«, ag/r) 
T£ xal yd^tog, xal oaog ue,p 
( § 26.) nsg rXavxwv disQ- 
XO[iai K ' sa dgxi. Plato. 



CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 



137 



XLIX. The price of a thing is put in the 
genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXV. 

1140. They serve in war Miafrbgoxgaxsvo)* bnoxav x\g 
for pay when any one has avxbg s diopai'* 3 . Xen. 
need of them. 

1141. They said that they nglafiai IITF <jp^t fm ^ o x*»Q a 
purchased the whole country unag xgidy.ovxa xdlarxov. 
for thirty talents. Xen. 

1142. For this great bene- Ovxog 6 fisyag tmgyiala dvo 
ft it exacts two drachms. dgaxpy ngaxxco m A Plato. 

1143. They took a great Ada nolvg Xa i u6uy(o sa , og 

mngdoxco F -f a xdlavxov niv- 
ts xal sl'xooi. Thucyd. 

El8id sa orvyegbg Egicpvlr], og 
XQvabg epilog dvyg dt%o- 



booty, which was sold for 
five andmtioenty talents. 

1144. I saw the hateful 
Euriphyle, who received gokl 
for her dear husband. 

1145. I would not ex- 
change my misery for thy 
attendance. 

1146. They say that 
neither the soldiers, who 
sold the command to him 
for money, are trust- worthy 
guards. 



(IV.l 



f a . Horn. 



obg Xaxgua 6 i t ubg dvonga- 



ulldc 



o.fa 



£ta ova 
iEschyl. 

(ptjul fi^ds o oxgaxiwxrjg^, og 
b vcqxV ctvxbg zgrjf.ioc p urco- 
dlda) t uL M - sa , ntoxbg U[il i: * r 
(§ 13.) cpgovgog (§ 14.). 
Herodian. 



L. The crime and punishment are put in the 
genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXVI. 

1147. He says that Aris- 0qp] 'Agioxeldrjg* dktr- 
tides was convicted of axoj A - ,I,F -« a dwgodoxla. 

bribery. Plut. 



12* 



138 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1148. Assuredly I will 
indict thee for things con- 
trary to law before Rhada- 
manthus. 

1149. Prosecute for theft 
before an arbitrator, and 
thou shalt not be in danger. 

1150. The Ephori re- 
called Sphodrias, and ac- 
cused him capitally. 

1151. If one compelled 
by another should kill any 
one, whom wilt thou accuse 
of the murder 1 



3 A{iiXsi ygdqxo "••#" ov nagdvo- 
[tog enl o c Paddfiav&vg s * 
Lucian. 

Aixdtpi M nXoTttj ngbg diairrj- 
T»jg a , xal ov yavdvvsvo). 
Demosth. 

c O 8 "Eyogog avdcxaXita f a xs 
6 2cpodglag, xal V7idyb) imp 
&dvaxog. Xen. 

El rig dvayxd£(a p - PA -/ a vtt 
aXXog s qoovsvco °^ a Tig, xlg 
alxidoiiai 6 (povog ; Lu- 



LI. The matter of which any thing is made, 
and the part by which any thing is taken, are 
put in the genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXVIL 

1152. Let him plait a nXixw (ivgolvri oxicpavog. Pin- 
wreath of myrtle. dar. 

1153. They are dragged, "EXxw, ov 6 gig, dXXd 6 nwyav. 
not by the nose, but by the Lucian. 

beard. 

1154. He gave to me the Eyw o SaxxvXiog -dida/u* 1 ai- 
ring made of iron. ' drjgog noiim F,PA ^ . Lucian. 

1155. If I raised my face, El fisv ngoocoTiov i$avloxr)iu°-P r 
they held me by the hair. tyog, now xaxixo* im ? . 

Eurip. 

1156. But Jesus having e O ds'lrjoovg xgaiico **•& avxog 
taken him by the hand, lifted 6 xslg, iyslgm imp avxog. 
him up. N. Test. 



<CQ INSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 



139 



1157. They raised the 
remaining stones with ma- 
chines made of short tiin- 
bers. 

1158. The young chil- 
dren they tie by the foot 
with a cord, fearing lest 
they may tumble down. 

1159. I likened her not 
to goddesses, but to works of 
skilful artists, made of stone, 
and brass, or ivory. 



Aelgto imp o snlXoinog Xi&og 
(xttfccvr) d %vXov ftgcixvg noi- 
s<o ppa p. Herodot. 



c O ds vijmog ncudlov di(o 
6 novg otuxqtov^, (xt) xara- 
xvU<o r -* u 'f a (§ 26.) dsifial- 
vta. Herodot. 

Ov &sa ys slxa^co^ a , %txyLxr\g 
d * ayad~bg drjy.Lovgyr]{ia, 
Xl&og, xal xaXxbg, % iXi<pag 
noiita *- r *-P. Lucian. 



LII. Measure or distance is put in the 
accusative. Grammar, Rule XXXIX. 



1160. He marched to 
Ephesus, which is distant 
from Sardis a journey of 
three days. 

1161. These banks were 
distant three or four hundred 
feet from the river. 

1162. And having gone 
forward about forty stadia, 
they encamped near a cer- 
tain eminence. 

1163. The fountains of 
the Euphrates and Tigris 
are distant from each other 
two thousand five hundred 
stadia ; but they unite near 
the city Seleucia. 



3 A7iigxo(iai A,,sa ig "Eysaog, og 
a7texio anb 2aq8ug xoslg 
^fiiga bdog. Xen. 

'O ds ox^V ovwg xgstg ij xix- 
xagsg nXs&gov anb o noxa- 
fibg ansxta im P. Xen. 

Kocl ngoiqxofiai A - PA - aa oxddiog 
a>g xsaaaqdxovxa, avXlfr- 
(iai f a nqbg Xocpog d tig. 
Thucyd. 

*0 nr\yr\ Evqtgdxrjg xocl Tiyqig 
duxw uXXyXwv S oxddiog 
dioxZXiot n svxaxoo 10 1 ' ovfx- 
6uXXh) ds xaxd ZeXsvxeia 
noXig a . Strabo. 



140 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



LIIL Time token, if indefinite and protracted, 
is put in the genitive. Gi'ammar, Rule XLL 



1164. For I have not 
seen them for a long time. 

1165. The following win- 
ter the sickness again fell 
upon the Athenians. 

1166. The same day the 
Athenians having passed 
over into Eubcea, engage 
also with the Chalcideans. 

1167. In ten years they 
will not come ; and when 
they come, they will depart, 
having accomplished not one 
of the things which they ex- 
pected. 



Ilolvg yecg avibg ovx ogetw 
Xgovog. Aristoph. 

* O 5' imylyvoficet FA x u V L ® v 
6 vooog xodsvxsgov imiil- 
tttw sa 6 A&rjvalog d . Thu- 
cyd. 

e cevxbg yftsgcc 6 A&tjvouog 
dia6alvo) PA,sa ig 6 Ev6oui, 
avfi6ceXl(o xeel 6 XceXxidsvg d . 
Herodot. 

Asxee fisv exog ovx V x0 ° ' oxav 
8s egxoficet A - su - sa , drcaX- 
Xceaaca p,s /, Ttgdaoca PA ^ a ov- 
ddg™ off 8 (§ 20., d., Ex. 
524.) iXnlfo im P. Plato. 



If definite, in the dative. 

1168. And the third 
month after his return he 
sailed to Andros. 

1169. They put also the 
JEginetae this same summer 
out of iEgin-a. 

1170. Wast thou present 
with Socrates on that day on 
which he drank the poison 
in the prison 1 



Keel fiSToc 6 xcexdnXoog a xglxog 
fi7]V dvecyea r S a in "Avdgog a . 
Xen. 

3 AvloT7]fiif a ds xeel Alyiv^xrjg 
o cevxbg &sgog ovxog e| 
Al'yivce. Thucyd. 

JIagaylyvofiat sa ^(oxgcexyg d 
ixs7vog 6 i] fit gee og 6 epceg- 
ficexov nivea sa iv 6 deafitox^- 
giov ; Plato. 



FREPfcSl I'lOXS IN COMPOSITION. 



141 



ine /to7^' '07?^, in the accusative. 



1171. They remained 
in • Macedonia three whole 
months, until he came from 
Thrace. 

1172. The Greeks having 
embarked sailed a day and 
a night with a fair wind. 



Kv.dijixm tmp sv Maxsdovla 
xoelg okog fiqv, ecog lyxo- 
{xou A - sa ex Oqkx^ De- 
mosth. 

c "Ekhjv avoc6ulv(o PA '** 
Tx/.ew im P rifisQCC xal vv!; 
■avsvjia d xukog. Xen. 



LIV. A preposition in composition often 
governs the same case, as when it stands by 
itself. Gramma?', Rule LL 



1173. Hearest thou not 
how many things they wit- 
ness against thee ? 

1174. Make for us gods 
svho shall go before us. 

1175. And having taken 
the sword, she slew herself 
before her husband. 

1176. He entered with 
Jesus into the palace of the 
high priest. 

1177. After we came into 
this rocky land, he kindled 
a fire. 

1178. He says that 
Chryses prayed against the 
Greeks to the god. 

1179. Fear not, that any 



Ovx axovfo noaog ov% xarot- 
(laQxvQtw ; N. Test. 

JToiio)^ a - s 6/w d &sog og tiqo- 
7ioqsvo[a(u iyoL N. Test. 

Keel lafi6dv(o eA - ,sa o £lq>og, 
eavxov Ti()oavouQm sa 6 avrig. 
Plut. 

JSvVBlCfEQXOflOU *-' sa o Itjoovg 
elg 6 avXrj 6 aQXUQZvg. 
N. Test. 

Exst ntxqatog oSe eloegx ' 
fiui A,5a z&Mi't avaxaua f a 
nvo. Eurip. 

Qn^il o Xqvar,g & xaxev^o- 



l/<(iog s Tigog 



6 &e6g\ Pluto. 



Mrj xyiuj 



'/„ »"•/<*. 



ontag au rig aw 



142 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



one may tear thee with thy 
children from this altar by 
force. 

1180. He laughs at Cra> 
sus, and at the boasting of 
the barbarian. 

1181. The Milesians hav- 
ing come to the Athenians, 
exclaimed against the Sami- 
ans. 

1182. Fighting for their 
masters, they easily put to 
flight those who resisted. 

1183. The rest of Greece 
revolted from the Athenians 
after the naval fight, except 
the Samians. 

1184. Alight from the 
chariot, Trojan dames, and 
lay hold of my hand, that 
I may set foot out of this 
vehicle. 

1185. Send therefore toith 
me some one of these trust- 
worthy persons, who shall 
declare whatsoever things 
thou mayest order. 



nalg fi(ti[*6g ods arro- 
ond(o 9V S a pia d . Eurip. 

KctrayeXdco 6 Kgdlaog s , xcci 
6 [xsyocXavxia S o (3dg6agog. 
Lucian. 

'0 Mdqoiog nag A&r/vaiog* 

SQXOfiOCl A - PA,sa , y,ttXU.6odbi tmp 

6 ZuiiiogZ. Thucyd. 



Tnegfid^oijai o deoTroirjg S, 



'&laT7]fit 



A.PA.p 



gctoitog 



tqsttq) M A Herodian. 
c O aXXog c EXXdg n dcplajri^i^^ 1 
A&rjvouog [isrd 6 vav^iayla a , 
nXr\v 2a]iLQg s . Xen. 

JEx6aZvo) sa anr\VT\, Tgwdg, 
XtiQ s ^' £{*og Xa[i6dv(o M,sa , 
'Xva I'lto ods o%og 8 c ioTi]fii * v f a 
novg. Eurip. 

2v}inefjt7i(fi f a ' 9 jolvvv iya> 6 
<x$i6niOTog ovxog rig, og 
sYga og av av (mariX- 
Aw ■*/*. Xen. 



LV. Verbals in tsov govern the dative of 
a person with the case of their primitives. 
Grammar. Rule XXXIV. 



1186. The others must not 
touch such a thing. 



O aXXog ovx aittiov o toiov- 
Tog s. Plato. 



VERBALS IN TfcOV. 



143 



1187. We must endure 
much more dreadful calami- 
ties than these. 

1188. Afterwards more- 
over the groom must lead out 
the horse where he shall rub 
him. 

1189. Thou hast no pre- 
tence that thou must not 
afford to us laughter. 

1190. They must not rule 
others, but must pay tribute 
to the Orchomenians. 

1191. The laws say not 
these things, nor the cus- 
toms of the state, which you 
must keep. 

1192. Whoever of thy 
servants may be sick, thou 
must take care of all these, 
that he may be cured. 



UoXv ovtog (§ 28.) dsLVog 
ovpcpOQa vjiofisvsTsov iyw. 
Isocr. 

"jSnEna yBfxrp) 6 Innov.ofiog 
e&xteov 6 Xnnog onov yrj/a. 
Xen. 

Ovdslg ov d (§ 33., a.) nqo- 
(paoig slfil, a>g ov ttuqexteov 
ov d iyo) d ysXcog a . Xen. 

Ov 6 aXXog s avrbg ccqxteov, 
aXX OQXO[ibviog cpogog 
olarsov. Isocr. 

Ov ovxog Xiyca 6 vofxog, ovds 
6 6 noXnda I'&og, og ne, P 
qtvXay.tiov ov. Demosth. 

a Og uv 7idfiv(o sv 6 olxirrjg, 
omog g ov sTiifisXrjTiov nag, 
oniag S-EQa7iEvoj* v . Xen. 



a. Sometimes verbals in %iov govern the accusative 
of a person. 

1193. The legislator must '0 vofxo&hrjg nugaTiov 6 no- 



endeavour to infuse pru- 
dence into cities. 

1194. One must dare to 
say what is true, especially 
when speaking of truth. 



Xig d <pQ0vt]0ig i/jmoiia. 
Plato. 
ToXfxrixEov 6 uXt)&T)g n0 
treat 1I,T - sa , aXXwg is xal 
ntql aXri&Eia 6 Xiyo) rA,a . 
Plato. 



144 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



LVI. Any verb may govern the accusative 
of a noun having the same derivation, or a 
similar signification. Grammar, Rule XXI., 
Obs. 1. 



1195. I have run a race 
such as no one ever (ran). 

1196. By reason of their 
power, they commit the 
greatest and most impious 
offences. 

1197. You have waged 
many mars, both against de- 
mocracies, and against oli- 
garchies. 

1198. Suffer me not to be 
unjustly banished from the 
country for which I have 
incurred many dangers. 

1199. At the river Mar- 
syas they engaged with the 
Persians, and fought a smart 
battle. 

1200. He sleeps a not 
happy sleep, having killed 
his children and wife. 

1201. Thou livedst the 
life of a hare, fearing and 
trembling, and ever expect- 
ing to be beaten. 

1202. Now having labored 



TQE%ia &g6(iog oiog ovdelg ma- 
nors. Men and. 

Aia 6 i^ovola a , fiiyag xal avo- 
Giog afiocQTrijfioi upaQTUvo). 
Plato. 

JloXvg av 7toXsfis(o noXspog, 
ttal ngbg dtjfj.oxgcnla 3 - , xa* 
ngbg ohyagxlu a - Demosth. 

Mr\ eya> negulda> sv - sa -P he 
6 Ttaxglg adlx&g EY.nl- 
tit(o ±- p *- sa - a (1011) vnig 
og g iyoj noXvg xlvdvvog 
xwdvvsvw. Lysias. 

*Enl 6 Magovag noTCtfibg d 
av^.6aXX(o sa re o ITeQarjg d , 
xal fid/t] n<xxona.if a loxvgog. 
Herodot. 

Evda d* vnvog ova Bvdalfxmv, 
ncclg (povsvo) PA -/°, nut 8a- 
fiup. Eurip. 

Aayoag §log ^«w tmp , dsl- 
doo M - PA -P not TQi(t(o, xctl asl 

TlXrjGOb) *- 1T,F - s f 7CQOa8oX(X(0. 

Demosth. 

PA/a 



Nvv oXvyog novsa 



XQO- 



VERBS WITH AN ACCUSATIVE OF SIMILAR SIGNIFICATION. 145 



a little while, we shall go 
the remaining way without 
fighting. 

1203. They swore a strong 
oath, neither to cultivate the 
consecrated land themselves, 
nor to allow another. 

1204. And now, when 
the Boeotians invited, imme- 
diately we obeyed ; and we 
thought that we should make 
a double revolt. 

1205. The glory of the 
Lord shone round about 
them ; and they feared with 
a great fear. 

1206. They found also 
those feasting, crowned with 
garlands of dry grass. 

1207. Let the slave be 
struck a hundred blows with 
the whip. 

1203. They consider not 
that no bird sings when it is 
hungry or is cold, or is 
afflicted with any other mal- 
ady. 

1209. After the battle, 
in which the Thebans over- 
came the Lacedaemonians. 



voq a , a^ua/sl c^Xombg (odog) 
nogsvoficci. Xen. 

"Ogxog ojxvva) f a loxvgog, ^utjts 
avrog n (§ 13., a.) 6 Upog 
yr\ eQyoc£o[icu™ T f a , /i^Tfi 
aXXog d imteinet l "*-tf. 
iEschin. 

Nvv 8i, insidrj BouoTog ngo- 
xaXeofiai f a , sv&vg vna- 
y.ovojf a * xal vo^w imp 
u<fiaxr\iii M - INF -// dmXoog 
omoGTctoig. Thucyd. 

z/o'ifa Kvgiog TiSQiXd/xnco f a 
avrog a ' xal cpo6ea) p S a cpo- 
6oq fiiyag. N. Test. 

K(xiaXay.6dv(o tm P xal ixuvog 
oxTjveo), oizqxxvoco P - PA J> o 
fygog /iXog ori<pavog. Xen. 

c O dovXog 7tXi]'/rj sxarov 6 fid^ 
OTi$ d Tvnno. Plato. 

Ov Xoyt£o{icu otl ovStlg ogvsov 
udco oxav Tisivdco 8U rj qi- 
yoo) su , tJ Tig uXXog Xvnr\ 
Xv7ii(o sv . Plato. 

Metu o fid^rj og vixd(a^ a Qr\- 
Saioq Aaxsdaifxoviog. Isocr. 



13 



146 



GREEK EXERCISES, 



a. Some intransitive verbs which express emotion, 
and in which an action is implied, though not described, 
govern the accusative. 



1210. Art thou not angry 
with Mars on account of 
these atrocious deeds 1 

1211. There were many 
things happening, at which 
one might be indignant. 



Ov vsfieol&iiat "Agrjg d odf 
xaQTsgog egyov ; Horn. 

Elyl (§26.) noXvg ylyvofiai, 
bg Tig av dvax^godvto °-f a . 
Plato. 



1212. With regard to such c O Toiomog owy.a iv noXefio? 
a body in war .enemies are 6 ix&gog &aggt(o. Plato. 
fearless. 

1213. They were angry 'AyuvaxTso) im P not aXyito im P 



and grieved at the Icing's 
having been taken away. 

1214. I rejoice at thy be- 
ing successful, and sitting 
by the towers of the enemies. 



o fiaoiXsvg xa&aigioj P - F4 -P* 
Herodian. 

Xalgaa 8s av evrvxico, nott 
TtgoarjUQu nvgyog d ex&gog. 
Eurip. 



b. Verbs of swearing govern the accusative of the 
object sworn by. 



1215. Swear not, neither 
by heaven, nor by the earth. 

1216. I swear to thee by 
the dog, and by the plane- 
tree, that these things are so. 

1217. But if thou shalt not 
do these things, by the Sun 
I swear to thee, assuredly I 
will satiate thee with blood. 



Mr) ofAwaV, fi^ts o ovgavog, 
fiyis o yij. N. Test. 

Ofivvco av 6 Hixav, xal 6 nXd- 
Tavog, ovtg) ovjog l^w INF . 
Lucian. 

El ds ovTog ov noiia, u HXiog 
BTTo/ivvfii av, rj /lltjv av 
alfia 2 xogsvviHo. Herodot. 



ADVERBS GOVERNING THE CASE OF THEIR PRIMITIVES. 147 



LVII. Some derivative adverbs govern the 
case of their primitives. Grammar, Rule XL V. 



1218. They lived not like 
robbers. 

1219. They wrestled the 
most excellently of the Athe- 
nians. 

1220. You be,ar water- 
drinking more patiently than 
lions. 

1221. Knowest thou how 
much more unpleasantly a 
tyrant lives than a king ? 

1222. Decree therefore 
the war worthily of Sparta. 

1223. Those who lead 
transgress more than tlwse 
who follow. 

1224. He is distinguished 
the most of the disciples of 
Protagoras. 

1225. Thou hast spoken 
rightly, and in a manner be- 
coming both thyself and thy 
country. 

1226. You will find him 
to have lived contrary to all 
the laws. 

1227. You seem to me 



Oi>X ofiolwg (678) ^ X]](nTjg 

§i(tiaxw fa . Isocr. 
IIa).alo)f a xaXXioxa (563) 

3 A&r]va7og. Plato. 

c Tdqo7ioala qcxov { § 28.) o 
Xecav (psgco. Xen. 

JSlffw** ooog (§ 28., d.) 
ai]8iois§ov ( § 28.) £(iw 
tvqavvog {jaaiXsvg ; Plato. 

Wfl<pi£a u * ovv a&ug (629) 
6 Znagxri 6 nvXefiog. 
Thucyd. 

'O a/o) PA Ttocgavo^ifo fiaXXov 
(§28.) 6 enoficu p \ Thu- 
cyd. 

Evdoxifiia * fidXiaxa (§22.) 
6 Hgcoxa/OQag fia&r}xi]g, 
Plato. 

'Og&wg e'gio), xal aavxov xs 
xal o nctxqig 7XQ€7x6vxayg 
(845). Plato. 

EvqIokw avxbg ivavxiwg 
(687) anag 6 vofxog 
^waxw^-P (§42.). iEs- 
chin. 

Jiyio uxuxwg uoxio) ovxog nag 



148 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



justly to endure all these 
things, since you are hon- 
ored above other men. 



vtousvm, eneiTreg Tifiaco 
diaopegorrcog (765) 6 alios 
av&gwnog. Xen. 



LVIII. Two or more negatives strengthen the 
negation. Grammar, Rule XLIIL, Obs. 2. 



1228. Than a moderate 
distrust there is not any 
thing more useful to mortals. 

1229. But in a good man 
no envy ever arises about 
any thing. 

1230. Nor let him ever 
deliver his opinion, either 
before the people, or in the 
senate. 

1231. Neither do nor 
meditate any thing, either 
impious or nefarious. 

1232. No longer is it law- 
ful for me either to look upon 
or to converse with any 
beautiful person. 

1233. And neither did 
any one attack from any 
quarter, nor did any one of 
the enemies come to the 
bridge. 



2(oq>Q0iv amaxla (§ 28.) ovx 
si/xl ovdelg %gr t oifiog figo- 
Tog d . • Eurip. 

Aya&bg d 8s ovdelg negl 
ovdelg % ovdsnoxs lyylyvo- 
(xai cp&ovog. Plato. 

Mrjds yvapr) snaf* fxijdenoxe, 
fiyis iv o dijfiog, fujis iv 
6 (iovlri. ^Eschin. 

Mr\xs aos6rjg firjdslg, fxt]8e avo- 

OLOg, [*1]Te 7T0l£(O s0 / a -"P, firjxS 

PovXsvu sv -f a . Xen. 
Ovxsxi I'lfiort iya ( § 40.) 

ovts 7Tgoa6Xs7itof a , ovxs 
diaXiyofiai v 'f a xnXbg (S39) 
ovdslg. Plato. 

Ktti O-VXS €7TlTcd-7]HL M ' sa ovdslg 

ovdocfio&sr, ovrs ngog 6 yi- 
qpvga a ovdelg egxofiav A ' sa 
6 noXefiiog. Xen. 



a. Except when they belong to two different verbs. 

1234. We are not able not Ov dvvafiai, og sl'dco sa xal 
to speak the things which oixovco fa , fir] Xcdsu. N. 
we saw and heard. 



CCXOVCO-^ 1 

Test. 



USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 



149 



1-235. The Phocians sent 
ambassadors to Lacedaemon, 
and said, that if they did not 
assist, they should not be 
able to avoid submitting to 
the Thebans. 



c O fpwxtvg ngsG^EVb) imp fig 
6 Aaxida^ucav, xal Xiyco imp , 
eus si [it] ftorj&eto °-f a , ov 
dvvaficu °ff fir) nel&w M,INF 
6 On6aio? (808) Xen. 



LIX. The article is often used for the rela- 
tive and demonstrative pronouns. Grammar, 
Rule IX. 



For the relative pronoun. 

1236. I will give to him 
the breastplate which I took 
from Asteropaeus. 

1237. Drink the wine, 
which the vines bore, which 
the old man planted. 

1238. He played in this 
village, in which were also 
these herds. 

1239. But know, if thou 
shall subdue these, there 
is no other' nation that will 
withstand thee. 



dldwfii ov #«oaf o 'Agtzqo- 

natog anavodw 1 ™? (§ 37., 

Ex.899.). Horn. 
nivta 9 oivog, 6 afinsXog cpi- 

Qb)f a , o q)Vievo)f a 6 yiqatv. 

Theogn. 

Uocl£(o imp tv 6 xcofxr} ovxog, iv 
6 elfil xal 6 fiovxoXia ovxog. 
Herodot. 

Eniaxafiac 8 k, u ovxog xaxa- 
oxqicpoi M , tlfil ovdtlg uXXog 
i&vog 6 ov vnofiiviti* He- 
rodot. 



For the demonstrative pronouns. 
1240. With them all the c O& 6' dnag nXr)^** mbiov, 



plain was filled, and it glit- 
tered with brass. 

1241. With them I was 
numbered on that day, when 
13* 



xal XdpTxw Mtm P x^xos d ' 
Horn. 

Mtxu o d Xiy(o r f a ^/ttao d 6, 
oxe tQXopat A,a 'Afia£oh> ' 



150 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



the Amazonians came ; but 
not even they were so many 
as the black-eyed Greeks. 



aXX* ovd 3 o m Tooog elpl, 
oaog IXlxwxji *A%aiQg. Hom. 



a. The use of the article as a demonstrative pronoun 
is chiefly confined to Ionic and Doric writers, though it 
is found in this sense in Attic writers also, but for the 
most part in the neuter and the oblique cases. 



1242. But this thing I 
think is not so : for consider 
also thou what I say. 

1243. These had a suspi- 
cion, that he was leading 
against the king, but never- 
theless it was resolved to 
follow. 

1244. They arrive, and 
enclose Mitylene in a circle 
with a single wall. 



c O ne 5' ol(iai ovx ovrwg s%(o ' 
oxonsco yctg xal ai) og p-ne 
Xsyco. Plato. 

e O d (§ 33., a.) ds vnoipia 

ElUl lmp , OTl Ct/(0P r TlQOg 

(laoiXsvg a , opcog ds do- 
7tB %L.im P $„ p aim . Xen. 

'0 <5' acpixvzofiai, xal nsoixst- 
#/£w MiTvXr,vr} sv xvxXog 
anXoog rst/og d . Thucyd. 



In the nominative the relative 8$ is used in this sense. 

Kal og, axovca f a ovxog, 
co#£&> M,mp aviog ex 6 rd$ig. 



1245. Whereupon he, 
having heard these things, 
thrust him out of the rank. 

1246. The light-armed 
men they put to flight, but 
they facing about defended 
themselves. 

1247. He indeed at first Kal og to [tsv Ttgmov oxvita tm P 
was loth, and was not alto- ts, xal ov navv s&sXa im * 



Xen. 
z O ds ipiXog TQsnco %mp , xal og 

VJCOGTQSqXO dflVVCO M - m i\ 

Thucyd. 



gether willing to answer. 



omoxolvofiaL f a . Plato. 



USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 



151 



b. The Attics moreover use the article as a demon- 
strative pronoun before the relatives og, oW, otoi. 

1248. When any one dies "Orav rig rsXsvraco sv ^ a 6 oaog 
of those who are deemed av diaytgovrcag iv 6 fiiog 
eminently virtuous in life. aycx&og xglvco p - su -/ a . Plato. 

But particularly in a division, where <? fAv, S tl, are opposed to 
each other, this that, the one the other, &c. 

1249. He persuaded them, ntldu im P avibg, xal deduct fa 
and gave to the one a. horse, 6 (Av Xnnog, 6 de yvvr t . 
and to the other a woman. Xen. 

1250. Through want some dC tvdeia* 6 fisv xXenrw, 6 de 
steal, some break into houses, roi/wgvzib), 6 de avdgotno- 



some reduce to slavery. 

1251. And having over- 
come in battle, some of the 
Athenians they slew, and 
some they took alive. 



fa 



dl'Cco M . Xen. 
Kul [*u%T} d xQarto) J ", o [iev 
diacp&eiQb) f a 6 'A&tjvcuog, 
6 de, £db) PA Xaix6avto sa . 
Thucyd. 

1252. Some possess forti- e O [uv, iv i,dovr^ 6 de, iv Xvjit}, 
tude in pleasures, others in 6 de, iv im-d-vftlu, 6 de, iv 
pains, others in desires, q>66og, o avdola xrao^iat. rp . 
others in fears. Plato. 

1253. They scruple not to Ovx oxvico ano(palv(o M negl 
pronounce concerning the 6 yr\ s, ondlog f re ayaxrbg 
earth, both what kind is elfil, xal 6nolog { xaxog * 
good, and what kind bad; dXXu. 6 f fiev yeyw, o f 8' 
but they blame this, and inatvito. Xen. 

praise that. 



Sometimes the relative pronoun is used instead of the article. 

1254. One they beat, "Og fib dig(of a , og de anoxrel- 
another they killed, another va fa , og de Xt&o6oXe(o **. 
they stoned. N. Test. 



152 GREEK EXERCISES. 

1255. Some of the men c ds 6 dvrig <x7ioXsl7T(o sa yswo*- 
they left to till the ground, yica, og ds dnodldoi^i M,JW > 
some they sold, some they og ds omoxTsivbif a . iElian. 
slew. 

LX. A substantive dual may have an adjec- 
tive plural. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 5. 

1256. He took two strong aIqsoj M - sa d' aXni[iog dogv 
spears armed with brass. dvco, xogvooco T ' VJL -P ^«A- 

xoV d . Horn. 

1257. He was full of so Tooovrog Ufil -ingaxn s nXstog, 
much disorder, as to have wW %a> (1088) iv avxov 
in himself two distempers voorjfjia^ dvo ivavriog du 
opposite to each other. «M??'Aa)j> d,du . Plato. 

1258. Have you two not Ov dsivbg dgoco) P Au , ^ria PA P 
done most villanous things, in nag syw xcaga ix6<xXXa sa ; 
seeking to expel me from Aristoph. 

every place. 

Also a substantive plural may have an adjective dual, when no 
more than two persons or things are alluded to. 

1259. Having a basket Kuvsov d* %w PA/du not xvxga 
and pot and myrtle-branches, y,ul (ivgglvrj, nXavdta m -p, 
we wander, seeking a place ^T£W PA - du xonog dngdyfiwv, 
free from trouble, where onoi xa&idgvw p - PA -/ a -d" &«.. 
seated we may abide. ylyvoficu°- sa -v av. Aristoph. 

a. Sometimes an adjective does not agree in gender 
and number with the substantive to which it is joined, 
but with another of equivalent signification. Grammar, 
Rule IL, Obs. 1. 

1260. The senate was c O ds povXf}* yovxfa «>w ,,np , 



A DUAL PUT WITH A PLURAL. 



153 



quiet, not being ignorant, 
that they were present hav- 
ing daggers. 

1261. The rabble nocked 
to the ships, wondering, and 
wishing to see Alcibiades. 

1262. The army procured 
food, as it could, from the 
beasts of burden, killing the 
oxen and asses. 



ovy. ayvoeco 



oxi ey/j 



Qidiov ¥%(» naynuL. Xen. 



a , davpa'Cco PA -P- n \ 
ovkofiat PA -P- m 



'0 oyXoq s a&QOi'C f ti p '^ a TiQoq 

6 vavq 

y.al el'dca 

6 Ak/.i6iadriq. Xen. 
c '0 de OTQUTev/ua 7ioo/£a) M - im P 

atxov, ojimq dvva/ucu imp , in 

6 VTZOQvytOV, XOTlTb) PA 'P- ra 

6 fiovq xul bvoc. Xen. 



LXI. A nominative dual is often put with 
a verb plural. Grammar, Rule IIL, Exc. 3. 

1263. Also other two sons Kal d 3 uXXoq dvo nulq riooei- 
of Neptune came. dutov lxvio[iai sa . Apoll. Rh. 

1264. With his hand he '0 (§ 59.) de xegfiddiov Xap- 
took a stone, which not two 6dvio sa /.sly* 1 , oq ov dvo 
men could carry. y 3 avrjQ qpe'ow °. Horn. 

Also a nominative plural, meaning but two persons or things, 
may be put with a verb in the dual. 

1265. Two rapid rivers XelfiafjgoQ nora^bq eq [ii- 
throio together their impetu- aydyy.Eta avp.6uXXo) oGqi^ioq 
ous water into a ravine. vdeag. Horn. 

1266. Two men skilful nuXaia^ioavvr^ i'djxwv dvrjg 
in wrestling display their in 3 aXXykaiv 6 - 1 * ebq dvacpal- 
strength upon each other. vto aXxrj. Oppian. 

«. A collective noun may be joined with a verb 
either of the singular or of the plural number. 

1267. The multitude spread c O de oyXoq ■ a^wwi'w^ euv- 
their garments in the way. %ov 6 ipatwv iv 6 bdoq. 

N. Test. 



154 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



1268. A swarm of bees 
having entered into the head, 

filled it with honey-combs. 

1269. The people of the 
Syracusans were at much 
strife among themselves. 

1270. The multitude of 
the soldiers rushed shouting 
upon Astyochus, in order to 
smite him : but he, fore- 
seeing, flies for refuge to 
a certain altar. 



3 £o[i6g s fxihoaa eodvfii PA,sa 
ig 6 xEcpcdr], xtjqIov S avrbg 
i(j,nXi]&(a f a P. Herodot. 

c O ds JZvgaxovoiog 6 dijfiog s 
iv noXvg 7iQog aXXqXwv a 
sQigslfilv. Thucyd. 

c O 5s nXrj&og B 6 OTQaTmvrjg 



oq^iao) 



A./a.p 



iyxgd^c 



PA.sa.p.m 



inl o AoTVo%og a , cotm 
fiaXXto INF ' o (§ 59.) 6e, 
7r^of/^w PA-5ffi , xaxacpsvya) inl 
ptifiog* Tig. Thucyd. 



NOTES. 



Example 1. You two rejoice, they two dance, are respectively the 
English expressions of the second person dual of xki^ui, and the third 
person dual of ^ooivu. 

2. In the imperfect and aorists of the indicative, verbs beginning with 
a consonant have the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 71. et seq.J, and 
those beginning with a, t, o, ai, av, ei, the temporal ( Grammar, page 72. J. 

3. The first future shortens the penultima of tpnivu by dropping /, and 
changes the iu of olxiu into wru, and the ou of xctxou into wru (Grammar, 
page 16.). 

4. In the first aorist, (riytka and opokoyiu have n in the penultima of the 
first person singular, these verbs making ntru in the first future (Grammar, 
page 76. ) : also piva changes t into u (Grammar, page 77. J. 

5. In the perfect, y^onpu, -xXout'^u, fyecu, and vtxdu, have the redupli- 
cation (Grammar, page 72. J ,• cchix'iu has merely the temporal augment, 
which is the same in all the augmented tenses (Grammar, page 72. J 
and iugitrxu, a defective verb, which is used only in the present and imper- 
fect, and borrows its perfect from the obsolete iv^iu (Grammar, page 
129. J, remains unchanged at the beginning (Grammar, page 73. J. 

6. The pluperfect of the defective verb yiyvutrxu is borrowed from the 
obsolete yi'ou ( Grammar, page 127. J, the perfect of which, there being 
no reduplication in verbs beginning with yv (Grammar, page 72. J, has 
the syllabic augment only, which remains the same in the pluperfect 
(Grammar, page 7 9. J. In the perfect of -riftiru, and consequently in 
the pluperfect, t is changed into o (Grammar, page 78. J. 

7. The second aorist drops the letter X in (ieixku, and the i in (pivyat 
and Xi'iru, and in x*€u, an obsolete root, from which the defective verb 
XapZAvu borrows its second aorist (Grammar, page 132.^, it changes the 
tt into a (Grammar, page 79. J. 



156 . NOTES. 

8. The second aorist, from which the second future is formed, changes 
the si of trTtigu and xriUca, and the i of ttXixu, into a, and drops the i of 
ttuSo) (Grammar, page 79. et seq.J. 

9. The present passive of vriTkyfti is formed from the present active, 
by changing pi into pxi, and shortening the penultima ( Grammar, 
page 110. J. 

11. The perfect of p'ittm has only the syllabic augment s, the redupli- 
cation being neglected in verbs beginning with £ (Grammar, page 72. J. 
In the perfect passive of r^iva i is changed into a, (Grammar, page 90. /, 
and in the third person plural the circumlocution of the participle with ilp) 
is used. 

12. The perfect of verbs beginning with <r joined to a mme has no re- 
duplication (Grammar, page 72 J, and therefore the pluperfect of anoint 
has only the syllabic augment t (Grammar, page 79. J, and moreover 
forms its third person plural from the third person singular, by inserting v 
before to ( Grammar, page 88. et seq.J. 

13. In xxkia the perfect, from which the paulo-post-future is derived, 
is formed irregularly (Grammar, page 76. J. In the reduplication of 
§uwru, instead of the rough mute $, the corresponding smooth r is used 
(Grammar, page 72. J. 

1 6. The second aorist active drops the second \ of trrlWu and uy- 
y'iXXeo, and changes the i of trrikXa and the a of tririioa into a, and the 
nr of fika,Tra> into £ ( Grammar, page 79. et seq.J. These changes 
remain in the second aorist passive. 

1 7. The second aorist active changes the rr of o-Qxttu into y, the £ of 
tiou into a, and the «rr of xou-z-tw into £ (Grammar, page 79. et seq J, 
which changes continue the same in the second future active, and the 
second future passive, which is formed from it. 

20. The second aorist active, from which the perfect middle is formed, 
drops the / of Qxlvw, and the £ of Xf/Va/, and changes the i of oioxu into a 
(or, as in Grammar, page 80., the i% in ox), and the <r<r of <xoxo-<ru into y, 
making 'icpxvov, sXitov, 'ioxqxov (or 'io^xxov), and tnoxyov (Grammar, page 
79. et seq.J. The perfect middle changes the a, of ttpxvov into n (Gram- 
mar, page 95. J, the i of £A<?r«v into oi (Grammar, page 96. J, the a of 
toetcxov into a (Grammar, page 95. J, and lengthens the short « of 
Ivoxyov (Grammar, page 216. J. 



NOTES. 157 

21. 'Axova in the perfect middle drops v, and prefixes its two first 
letters to the temporal augment ; and in the pluperfect it receives a new 
temporal augment ( Grammar, page 7 4. J. YIu<r%u is a defective verb, 
and borrows its pluperfect middle from the obsolete vrUOu ( Grammar , 
page 134. ). 

24. 'Eugirxa is a defective verb, and borrows its second aorist from the 
obsolete tuoiu ( Grammar, page 129. ). Yl^oo-ayu, a verb compounded of 
the preposition *£>$, and the defective verb a.yu, which borrows its second 
aorist from the obsolete kyayu (Grammar, page 125 .), takes its aug- 
ment, which is the temporal, between the preposition and the verb ( Gram- 
mar, page 74. ). Likewise avrnhfiufu, which is compounded of the prepo- 
sition a^ro and the verb Vdupi, takes the syllabic augment in the middle 
after «t«, which then loses o, because a preposition in composition before 
a vowel loses its final vowel ( Grammar, page 15.). The t of rjiarw 
becomes a. in the second aorist (Grammar, page 80. J. 

25. TL'ittu borrows its second future middle from the obsolete -ricriu 
(Grammar, page 135. J. 

26. 'Ia-jvo? and 'l-rro; are substantives of the second declension, being 
declined like \'iyo$ (Grammar, page 12. J. Kiuv, B-igat<rav, and xri^v%, 
are of the third declension ; the first two, which are to be here given in 
the dual number, form the genitive like Igaxav (Grammar, page 17. J, 
and the other forms it like &y£ag (Grammar, page 20. ). The verb §ie», 
being a dissyllable, admits no contraction in the third person plural of the 
imperfect (Grammar, page 103. J ; but xop.iu, in the third person dual of 
the imperfect, contracts a into u (Grammar, page 98. J. 

27. The substantive uvtjo is declined in Grammar, page 26. The 
compound verb xarakt'^ru takes the syllabic augment after the preposition 
xa.Tx (Grammar, page 74. ), which then loses its final a (Grammar, 
page 15.)-. 

28. The substantive \v\<rrn$ (except in the vocative, where it makes « 
or a) is declined like <ri\uv*$ (Grammar, page 10.), and vroXiftios like 
Xoyo; (Grammar, page 12.). The translation, with the sign of the tense 
affixed to iiyiafuti, shows that the third person singular of the second aorist 
imperative of this verb is required. 

29. The declension of the adjective ft,ct*eo; is given in Grammar, page 
40., and that of the neuter substantive rt7%ot, which is to be here written 
in its contracted form, page 22. 

14 



158 NOTES. 

30., 31., 33. The adjectives Wxoo?, xdkxsos, and ^va-tog, in their 
simple form, are declined in the masculine like </oo; (Grammar, page 13.,/, 
in the feminine like yuXin ( Grammar, page \\.), and in the neuter like 
oerriov (Grammar, page 13. J ,• and in their contracted form, in which they 
are to be here given, like those three words respectively after contraction. 
The substantives rutpgog, ro7%o$, and ffri<pxvoi, of which the first is of the 
feminine and the two others are of the masculine gender, are declined like 
Xoyos ( Grammar, page 12. J, 

32. The adjective vohuxni is declined like akn6m (Grammar, page 
46. J. Concerning xuuv, see Grammar, page 26. 

35. The declension of the adjective v$v$ is given in Grammar, page 41. 
"T^ forms its genitive from the obsolete ffias '(Grammar, page 20. J. 

36. The adjective %(>v<roxi£u$ is here declined like (fnXoyiXus ( Gram- 
mar, page 46. J, but sometimes like ivyius. 

37. XxXxotfoug is declined like Vivovs (Grammar, page 48. J. 

88., 39., 40., 41. The comparative of ffaQgav is given in Grammar, 
page 50. ; the comparative of fuxgog and the superlative of xXuvos, the 
penultima of these words being long, are formed like those of tv$o%os ' and 
the superlative of cLOXiot, the penultima of which is short, is formed like 
that of troQo;. Comparatives in rtgos are declined like ftu-x^h (Grammar, 
vage 40. J, and superlatives like xukot. 

4:3. The adjective uxv; is declined like rdus (Grammar, page 41. J, and 
the defective verb tg%of/u; borrows its second aorist from the obsolete 
iXivSu (.Grammar, page 129. J. 

44. M/Xaj is declined in Grammar, page 43. Nay?, in the common 
declension of the word, is very irregular, making, in the singular, G. vs<wj, 
D. vnt, A. vavv, and in the plural, N. vrug, G. nm, D. vccvo-i, A. vkus. 
The verb ifopui is augmented by changing s into ti ( Grammar, page 73. J. 

45. The adjective ivxvn^n is declined like the substantive xvvp);, gen. 
-7}os, having but one termination, and being masculine and feminine only 
(Grammar, page 49. J. The defective verb IkXvu borrows its second 
aorist middle from the obsolete oXiu ( Grammar, page 133. J. 

46. The adjective oguvog is declined like xaXes (Grammar, page 40. J, 
and $u<r€ares like 'ivhofys ( Grammar, page 46. J. 

47. UoXvs has only the singular of the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative, masculine and neuter, and borrows all the rest from the obsolete 
voW'os ( Grammar, page 49. J. 



NOTES. 159 

49. The present participle middle of cu6a> is formed like the present 
participle passive of tvttu ( Grammar, -page 85. J, and declined like x.akis 
(Grammar, page 40. J. 

51. The translation shows the perfect passive of ou^u to be required. 

52. The present participle of <pivyu is declined like ixuv (Grammar, 
page 43. / 

53. Concerning f/Ayx;, see Grammar, page 49. 

54. The signs affixed to y^a^ica show that the present participle is re- 
quired, and the translation moreover that it must be in the passive voice. 

55. Yla; is declined in Grmnmar, page 43. Shall mourn is the En- 
glish expression of the first future middle of kotttu. 

51. 'Ecyoc^c/xea is augmented in the first aorist middle by changing t 
into u (Grammar, page IS. J. 

5'S. 'Iv^os is declined like >Jyo; ( Grammar, page 12. J, and the second 
aorist participle active of iie-ig%o/utai, a verb compounded of the preposition 
tl;, and the defective verb so^o/Ltxi, which borrows its second aorist from the 
obsolete iXtiSu ( Grammar, page 129.), like Xkuv ( Grammar, page 43. J. 

60. The third person plural passive of -rotfiu contracts to into ou 
(Grammar, page 98. J. 

65. Kxdovtrni; is of the second declension. 

68. In the perfect of igdu, the syllabic augment with the rough breath, 
ing is prefixed to the temporal ( Grammar, page 12,). 

69., 70. 'Micriw and rifia-co are to be contracted as directed in Gram- 
mar, page 98. AuKilxiftovio; is of the second declension. 

71. The defective verb yiyveoo-x-u borrows its first future middle from 
the obsolete y\'ou (Grammar, page \21.J. 

74., &c. The gender and number of adjectives, adjective-pronouns, and 
participles, used without substantives, are to be determined from the trans- 
lation, when not indicated by the characters elsewhere employed for that 
purpose. Thus the sense of the corresponding English words shows that 
rfe, in Example 74., must be written in the masculine plural ; euros and 
iKitvof, in Example 78., in the neuter plural ; the second aorist participle 
of tUtu, in Example 79., in the feminine singular ; the present participle 
of cthtx'iot, in Example 81., in the masculine plural ; and Yixato;, in the 
same Example, in the masculine. N is to be added to the third person 



160 NOTES. 

plural of lyxuptaZ,*), because the following word begins with a vowel, 
(Grammar, page 5.). 

77. "E_^w is augmented in the imperfect by changing i into a (Gram- 
mar, -page 73. ). 

78. In the reduplication of the perfect of S-idce/xou, <r is used instead of 
3- (Grammar, page 72. ). 

79. TUtoj borrows its second aorist from the obsolete rtxa (Grammar, 
page 136.). 

81., 82. Zyfiiou, uSrAa, uQiXiu, and tri ^varied are contracted accord- 
ing to the rules in Grammar, page 98. 

83. "Ovxg is used only in the nominative, accusative, and vocative sin- 
gular ( Grammar, page 34. ), and consequently is indeclinable (Grammar, 
page S.J. 

84. Allied has its second aorist middle from the obsolete %\u ( Gram- 
mar, page 125. ), which is augmented by changing s in ti (Grammar, 
page 73. J. lAieawm is of the second declension. 

85., 87. "Kgdoftai and %&>gia> are contracted according to the rules in 
Grammar, page 98. 

88. The t following a in the third person singular perfect passive of 
<ruX,w is dropped in the first aorist (Grammar, page 91. J. 

89. The verb Waivia is compounded of W), which loses its final vowel 
before the following vowel (Grammar, page 75. J, and alviat ' and there- 
fore is augmented in the middle (Grammar, page 7 4. J, which is done by 
changing at into y ( Grammar, page 72. J ' also 'he ti of the third person 
singular perfect passive is changed into s in the first aorist (Grammar, 
page 91. J. ^<xa%rn is of the first declension. 

94. Tlgouyto is compounded of w^o and ayu, and is therefore aug- 
mented in the middle (Grammar, page 74. ) ; but vifi and v^o, and some- 
times ocfjcip), retain their final vowel before another vowel (Grammar, page 
75.). 

97., 98. Bv^oivnov and "A^x^os are of the second declension. 

102. AiabtS^ao-xu is compounded of ha, and the defective verb ^ibgutrxai, 
which borrows its second aorist from tfipi (Grammar, page 128.,/. 
Aia.irtiofx.on usually takes the augment at the beginning and in -the middle 
(Grammar, page 74.), but here it has only the temporal augment in the 
middle, which is made by changing at into % (Grammar, page 72.^. 



NOTES. 161 

103. 'EZ'Xiyxaf receives the temporal augment in the middle after i§ 
(Grammar, page 74. ). _ 

104. 'AtrefaXXa; has the syllabic augment in the middle after k-rl 
(Grammar, page 74. J, which then loses o (Grammar, page 15. J. 

105., 106. liKiXia, and Mayrm/a are of the first declension. Tirgutrx* 
borrows its first aorist passive from rgoco ( Grammar, page 136. J. 

108. 'Ecrays^a^a/ is compounded of It) and «y«, which lose their last 
vowels before other vowels (Grammar, page 75. J, and tg%oju.a.i, and 
receives its augment after ava (Grammar, page 7 4. J. N is to be added 
here for the same reason as in Example 74. 'P^»j is declined like -n/j.* 
( Grammar, page 10. J. 

111. In the imperfect of pirru £ is doubled after the syllabic augment 
( 'Grammar page 72. J. 

112., 115. X«A*>j$<yy forms its genitive like £sA/S<iy (Grammar, page 
17. J, and KogivDo; is of the second declension, both words being of the 
feminine gender (Grammar, page 7. J. 

116. The first aorist passive of tugitrxa is borrowed from ivgiaj ( Gram- 
mar, page 129. J, and, like I-ttccmu in Example 89., changes the n in the 
penultima of the perfect passive into i (Grammar, page 9\.J. "Agurof 
is of the second declension. 

118., 119. "l^u and uQixviopxi have no augment, i undergoing no 
change in the tenses susceptible of augmentation (Grammar, page 73. ). 
The plural 'Afavxi is declined like the plural of rtp-h ( 'Grammar, page \0.J. 
Concerning the plural of y«Dj, see Note to Example 44. 

121, XffMWU lias its first aorist from %'ou (Grammar, page 138. J, 
before the syllabic augment of which uro loses o (Grammar, page 75. J. 
The present participle of p'nu is to agree with totx^o; in the accusative 
singular. 

122. llo'itrtui is declined like irlxi/cu; (Grammar, page 24. J and 
T>9-<ra<p»gy»; like rgivgvs (Grammar, page 22. J 

1 25. Outo; , agreeably to what is said in the Note to Example 74., 
must be in the neuter singular. Kar" is for koctx, the apostrophe de- 
noting the omission of a (Grammar, page 5. J. 

127. Ou becomes ouk before the syllabic augment of Koipxoj ( Gram- 
mar, page 5. J. 

14* 



162 NOTES. 

133. '"Enreiva takes the syllabic augment in the middle after the pre- 
position It) (Grammar, page 74. J, which then loses its final t ( Grammar^ 
page 15. J. 'Atrhvhs is declined like a.\n6yis ( Grammar, page 46. J. 

135. 0£«£ forms its genitive like S-<vgec% ( Grammar, page 20. J. 

136. ' A.<pr,yiof*,Kt is compounded of the preposition «.<ro, which drops a 
and changes <r into <p before a vowel having the rough breathing (Gram- 
mar, page 75. J, and the verb fiy'to/tou, which beginning with « has no 
augment ( Grammar, page 73, J. "Opygos is of the second declension. 

140. Kktcck^Ivm in the perfect passive has the reduplication between 
x,xtu, and xgivu (Grammar, page 74. J, and loses v (Grammar, page 78. J* 

141. In uQiffwipi avro is changed as in Example 136., and "trr^fn 
forms its perfect from trrdcu, future avhttw (Grammar, page 104.^, which 
beginning with <r joined to a mute, the perfect has only the syllabic aug- 
ment (Grammar, page 72. J, which has the rough breathing of the present 
'l<r<r-4[/.i ( Grammar, page 113. J, and takes an t in the pluperfect (Ibid. J. 

142., 143. *Ek\as is feminine and makes its genitive like Xa/utTrug 
(Grammar, page 18. J, and xr^vos is declined like tu%os (Grammar, 
.page 22. J. 

144., 145. In the second aorist of IftGxkXw, ift becomes iv before the 
syllabic augment (Grammar, page 75. J. The substantives 'A^a/a, 
"Hxuat, KstpaXXvivtci, and ' Ap^et^vBcvix, are declined like <pi\ia (Grammar, 
page 9. J, and Ad-oiinra, like fiovtrx. 

146., 150. Tgi%M in eoiar^i^co and Lrji^a borrows its second aorist 
from Ififtw ( Grammar, page 136.,/. ' Ax^oxo^vSog and 'AgysTos are of the 
second declension, and the former of the feminine gender. 

147. 'ILxxkivsj in the first aorist takes the syllabic augment after U 
(Grammar, page 74. J, which then becomes \\. 

1 53. Ila? is to be given in the neuter plural, according to what is said 
in the Note to Example 74., &c. E7£« adds 6«. to the end of the second 
person singular perfect middle, and drops la. from the middle of it. 

154., 156., 157. Ka.fioux;as is of the second declension; 0ugiu and 
KuWwn, of the first ; and 'A%iguv, of the third, forming its genitive like 
fydxnv ( Grammar, page 17. J, and is moreover of the masculine gender 
(Grammar, page 7. J. 

159., 160. ~Bxiva> in iffSatvu has its second aorist from filSny.i (Gram- 
mar, page 126.,). X/fl* and Kvgos are of the second declension. 



NOTES. 163 

163. AapZivu takes its second aorist from XriZa (Grammar, page 
1S2.J. MJjJa; is of the second declension. 

166., 167. 2n>ufr*i is of the first declension, and Udr^eKkee of the 
second. 

169. 'Ecmwj is declined like fiorgvs ( Grammar, page 25. J, and Tag- 
raeos like kiyog. 

1 73. 'Ya.ppri'Ttxos is of the second declension, and Al6lo$ makes Altilt- 
iras in the genitive. 

181., 183., 184. MvofAi^uv forms its genitive like x%\thui (Grant' 
mar, page 17. J, <&cUt\ like §u^a.\ (Grammar, page 20. J, and Tuiiilns is 
of the first declension. 

182. See note to Example 44., concerning the dative plural of vat??. 

190. The second aorist middle of al^iu is borrowed from 'iku (Gram- 
mar, page 125. J. The dative singular of vatJ? is given in Note to Ex- 
ample 44. 

193. Aitiu takes its perfect middle from %\u ( Grammar, page 128 . J . 

195. "0>.uv6os is of the second declension. 

196., 198., 199. The second aorist of t%u is borrowed from tr%iv 
(Grammar, page ISO. J, that of iIo'ktku from iv^iu (Grammar, page 
129.^, that of alpu from i\u (Grammar, page 125. J, and that of Ittftatt, 
in the active voice, changes ecu into oi (Grammar, page 80. J, which ter- 
mination in the passive it changes into r* (Grammar, page 92. J. 

203. 'JLyeunt being in the feminine singular, the pronoun <rv understood, 
with which the second aorist participle of tg%of*cci and "rrvpt, and the 
singular first aorist imperative of \'iyu, must agree, is also in the feminine 
singular. 

204., 205., 207., 209. K^o7<ros is of the second declension ; and 'AYi*t, 
'Aofttux, and Belexn, of the first. Concerning Hat, see Grammar, page 76. 

210. In the perfect of xipvru i is changed into o (Grammar, page IS. J. 
TliXoToiirxros is of the second declension. 

214. Mt*' is for fttrx, a being cut off because the next word begins 
with a vowel, and r changed into 6 because that vowel has the rough 
breathing ( Grammar, page 5. J. 

215. 2ri»3*» borrows its first aorist from «•«■!/« ( Grammar, page 136. J. 
Xi/0/Vapn; is of the second declension. 

216. The perfect participle of Urn/m is syncopated and contracted, as 
in Grammar, page 119. 



164 NOTES. 

219. The perfect middle of xairxt* is borrowed from ftitSa (Grammar, 
■page 134.y. MtiSias is of the first declension. 

221. The plural ®ur7cia) is declined like the plural of 0/X/« (Grammar, 
page 9. J. 

231., 232. Tnrira,(pi^vni has its accusative according to the first declen- 
sion ( Grammar, page 22. J ; ' Ayupipvuv, gen. -vovo's, forms its vocative 
by shortening the long vowel of the nominative. (Grammar, page 21. J ; 
and yow makes yovvccros in the genitive, by epenthesis, for yovxms, from 
the obsolete yovag (Grammar, page 16. J. 

234. 'E^ in Ifivr'iTgv/zi becomes h before the syllabic augment (Gram- 
mar, page 75. J. 

236. Kuri%a> is compounded of koctu, which loses its final vowel before 
the following vowel, and 'lx,a>, which takes its second aorist from axS u 
( Grammar, page 130.^. 

237. See Note to Example 216. 

240. In the perfect of h^ixra-ca the two first letters of the present are 
prefixed to the temporal augment ( Grammar, page 73. J. 

241. 'Srgi/fiav and 'ExX/nrTovros are masculine. 

242., 245., 246. "Agyo$ is declined like nl^os (Grammar, page 22. J, 
HX/j like IXvts (Grammar, page 19. J, and Tvhiov like guXav (Grammar, 
page 12. J. 

247. The first aorist of udia is borrowed from 2>6w (Grammar, page 
138.^, and has the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 73. J. 

248. Txyyn; is here declined like Tgtfyvis (Grammar, page 22. J, else- 
where commonly like rikuvn; (Grammar, page 10. J. 

254. "Afsifti is compounded of «to, and the verb ilpi, conjugated in 
Grammar, page 115. Kxiavbgos is of the second declension. 

255. "Ea.*w changes i into u for its augment (Grammar, page 73. J. 
The third person singular perfect passive of x.\iiu, from which the first 
aorist is formed, ends sometimes in rttt, but here in trrai (Grammar, 
page 90. J. 

260. 'Evtp^eirtjs is declined like nkuvvs (Grammar, page 10. J, and 
Tiy^s like o<pi$ ( Grammar, page 23. J. Both are masculine (Grammar, 
page 7.). 

262. The second aorist of xari^a is formed as in Example 236. 
MccKttovia is declined like pxia (Grammar, page 9. J. 



NOTES. 165 

263. HLxhuhw takes its augment at the beginning or in the middle 
(Grammar, page 74.y, but here at the beginning. 

268. T%itpa> in the first future, and consequently in the first aorist, 
changes r into S- (Grammar, page 7? .). 

277., 279., 285. Kovuv is declined like Ukdruv (Grammar, page 
17. J, fohutta and wwt like QiXia (Grammar, page 9. J, and 2a>xg«Tflf 
like r^r/i^tis ( Grammar, page 22. J. 

288., 290. The proper names in these examples are of the second 
declension. 

295. In the accusative of Zivs the final vowel is to be dropped, because 
of the vowel at the beginning of the next word, and the omission denoted 
by an apostrophe (Grammar, page 5. J. 

298. In irooxuoiui the o of t^o is contracted with the syllabic augment 
into ov ( Grammar, page 75. J. KtxgoTiu is declined like <piXia ( Gram- 
mar, page 9. J, and the plural 'A%x£vou like the plural of the same word. 

300. The first aorist of u6iu» in 1tu>6'iu is borrowed as in Example 
247., and the first future of yiyvo/axi in trvyyiyyofixt from yt/ta (Gram- 
tnar, page 127. J. 

301., 303. The imperfect of Z,xu contracts xi into v ( Grammar, page 
103./ See Note to Example 127., concerning ov, and Note to Example 
112., concerning XaXx>i5<wv. 

305. *A-rori\iu has i instead of n in the penultima of the first future 
and first aorist ( Grammar, page 76. J. 

310. UguTxyloas is of the first declension, and vgoo-roov of the second. 

HI 6. The iEolic form of the first aorist optative of xxrax'o-rru is here 
used. See Grammar, page 71. 

319. Tou; is declined like ^«j ( Grammar, page \9.J. In fiy'w £ is 
doubled after the syllabic augment ( Grammar, page 72. J. 

320. Soe Note to Example 44. 

322. The first aorist of tit^uo-ku is borrowed from rtfu (Grammar, 
page 13G.y, and that of <p\^u from the present inyxu (Grammar, pages 
137., 17. J. 

327., 331. The first aorist optative of rikioj and tiXivtkoi must be 
given in the iEolic form. See Example 316. 



166 NOTES. 

333. In tta.fpa.iu, compounded of hd. and pu.it), g is doubled, because this 
letter begins the verb, and the preposition ends with a vowel ( Grammar, 
page 75. J. 

334. "A^jjro? belongs to the second declension. 

344. 'Ev^Uxeo has its perfect from tvgiu ( Grammar, page 129. J, and 
ua,v0Kvw from ftatJiw ( Grammar, page 132. J. 

351. 'Ptjtros is declined like Xoyos. 

354. YLafiXxco is compounded of xwra. and zkxa, the final vowel of the 
preposition being dropped, and the smooth t being changed into the rough 
S-, before the rough breathing of the vowel at the beginning of the verb. 
The augment is as in Example 255. 

358. B«/v&/ in a,*ro€a.iva) borrows its first future middle from /3a<w 
( Grammar, page 126. ). 

360. Q}a i Q?u.%aZ t os is of the second declension. 

374. In the contract verb Irccmco the Attic form of the optative is here 
used, which is made by changing (nt into r,v ( Grammar, page 103. J. 

378. Kh'iu here retains i in the first future and first aorist. 

384. The first future middle of (tavd&vco is borrowed from y.a&iu (Gram- 
mar, page 132. J. 

389. The second aorist of (haivu in u-roSaiva is formed from (HGti/ii 
(Grammar, page 126. J, and the first aorist passive of <pi^&, in xara^u 
from h'iKca (Grammar, page 137. J. 

398., 400. The second aorist of ytyvuo-xu comes from yvupi (Gram- 
mar, page 127. J, and that of 'ix, 60 from <r%t«> ( Grammar, page 130. J. 

403. The first aorist of Ixipigio is formed like that of <pi^u in Example 
322. 

414. The plural 2«^s/j, gen. 'Sufituv, Attic, or 2«^/j, gen. 2afiiuv, 
Ionic, is declined like the contracted plural of oQt; (Grammar, page 23. J, 
and YLgaiitros and ~2ce.f4.os like Xoycs. The perfect active of kxianu is 
formed from a.x'ou (Grammar, page 126. J, and has a passive significa- 
tion. 

417. The proper names in this example are of the second declension, 
with the exception of 'YtpiK^&rns, which is declined like T^in^ns ( Grammar ; 
page 22. J. 

418. The optative of the contract verb jroXifAiu is to be here given in 
the Attic form. See above, Example 374. 



NOTES. 167 

432. Kaxxa'&oxr,; is declined like <riXu*n$ ( Grammar, page 10. J. 

433. The n in the penultima of the third person singular perfect passive 
of aipiai is chai.ged into t in the first aorist (Grammar, page 9\.J. Aaxi- 
}a.ip.u* forms its genitive like %i\3vv ( Grammar, page 17. ). 

448. KiOctiouv is masculine, and declined like YlXarav (Grammar, 
j>age 17.,/, and the plural 07>£*i like the plural of the first declension. 

449., 453. The first aorist of 'hox.u is formed from Yoxu (Grammar, 
page \2S.J. 

451. In Xy^oiou, iy becomes U before the syllabic augment (Gram- 
mar, page 75. J. 

463. The second future middle of r^y^ca is formed from toif/.u (Gram- 
mar, page 136. J. 

475., 476. <£>cl<ri{ is masculine, and forms its genitive like \Xv)s 
(Grammar, page \9.J, and AWi//iv>j is of the first declension. 

480., 481. HXa.ra.ix, 3oicutix, and AlrmXtet, are of the first declension ; 
lIi}.oTovyr,iros and llgotr%u)i, of the second ; and AioXi; and Hxtvouv, of 
the third ; AloXt;, which is feminine, forming its genitive like iX'rii ( Gram- 
mar, page \9), and IlXtveuv like TLxdruv ( Grammar, page 17. J. 

485., 486., 487. Aafivivro; and 1u<pcov'itrx.os are of the second declen- 
sion, ' kfjL^ut is declined like TlxdTcov, and Ztug Dorrows its genitive from 
the obsolete AU (Grammar, page 20. J. 

498., 499 'Hgctiov is declined like \vXot and Kct^Sua-tis like TiXeivnf. 

503. The adjective Atvxuhioi has three terminations. See Note to 
Example 44. 

510., 512. Kiv«<p<wv forms its genitive as in Grammar, page 17., and 
Kkiao%o; is of the second declension. 

519., 521. K»<piuf is declined like fiutriXth; (Grammar, page 23. J, 
and Ku*%ctor.; here forms its accusative according to the first declension, as 
'li7<rct<pi£VT>;, in Example 231., and other proper names declined like 
'roir^vi some-times da ( Grammar, page '22. J. The pluperfect of Xctu.ia.vu 
is borrowed from ;.^» (Grammar, page 132. J, and has u instead of the 
reduplication (Grammar, page 74. J, and moreover makes t<rx* in the 
nird person plural ( Grammar, page. 71., Ubs. 4. J. 

528. The optative of the contract verb o^xu is to be written in the 
Attic form. See Note to Example 374. 



168 NOTES. 

531. <$>ivyu and vronu makes s<r«v instead of utretv in the third person 
plural of the pluperfect. See Note to Example 521. 

547. The imperfect of h^dca has the syllabic augment "with the rough 
breathing prefixed to the temporal (Grammar, page 73. J. ' AgnrroQuviK 
is declined like rgwgtis- 

548. The plural Mvkx) is declined like the plural of the first declension, 
554. Techdras is of the first declension. 

558. 2aA«/*<j forms its genitive like $ik<pi$ f Grammar, page 19. J. 

560. See Note to Example 44. The first aorist of kyvvw is taken, 
from ayu (Grammar, page 125. J, and has the syllabic augment instead of 
the temporal, ( Grammar, page IS.). 

562. *AS« is of the first declension. 

578., 579. The superlative of -ffoXus is formed irregularly (Grammar, 
page 52. J, and the comparative of lyxgxrbs by adding rsga? to the neuter 
singular (Grammar, page 50. J. jj3!gg«$*is declined like nXavns. 

588. Aogo forms its genitive from the obsolete Sega; (Grammar, page 

16.;. 

596., 597. 'Ii£uv is declined like likdreav ( Grammar, page 17. J, and 
Aiytvs like ficcftktvs (Grammar, page 23. J. 

599., 600., 601. luKtyu) Is declined like a.l$a>$ (Grammar, page 24.;, 
Tagffo) like the plural of Xoyog, and "Okvrxt like the plural of the first 
declension. 

604., 606. Kvgxru^yis and lAa<r<ra.\turris are declined like nkavri$. 

615. 'Axagvav makes avos in the genitive, like vratdv ( Grammar, page 

17.;. 

623. Tagagrn; and"Oga; are masculine ( Grammar, page I.J. 

633. Iixuuv is masculine, and forms its genitive like TLxdruv (Gram- 
mar, page 17. J. In the first future of \uxuv\Z,u r is dropped, and the 
last syllable circumflexed (Grammar, page 76. J. 

637. 'Avolyu is here augmented by changing oi into <w, and to this 
prefixing t ( Grammar, page 73. J. 

639. A/aXJ; makes its genitive like i\*)s (Grammar, page 19. J, and 
Tg««j like XufcTas (Grammar, page 18.;, both words being feminine. 

645., 647. Ev^agpe? and /V^i/gaV, the penultima of these words being 
long, retain o in the comparative } but evitros and vrXovirios, their penultima 



NOTES. 169 

being short, change o into &> (Grammar, page 50. J. N^it/j and 'O'&tMfftht 
are declined like (Zae-iktl; (Grammar, page '23. J, and Ktx^a^ makes 
K'tK£oxof in the genitive. 

656. 'Icroxoarns is declined like <rgwgvs. 

661. Instead of i<p*iv, »Ty is here used ( Grammar, page 124., bottom.). 

664. <J>/Aoj in the comparative changes es and ai (Grammar, page 51. J. 

666., 667. X/«f and Aax(J«^«» are feminine (Grammar, page I.J, 
the former declined as in Example 159., and the latter as in Example 433. 

671. ~2t60rn is of the first declension. 

684., 6B5. Tiytarnf is declined like nXurws, and Kmeritpuv like Se»#- 
^<w» (Grammar, page 17. J. 

689. 'EX/xa/v is masculine; <t>wx); is feminine, and declined like iX-r/y 
(Grammar, page \9.J. 

701. M/vwj is elsewhere declined like %eus (Grammar, page 19. J, but 
here like nu; (Grammar, page 14. J, and moreover drops v in the accusa- 
tive ( Grammar, page I4.y. 

714. In uku the perfect middle changes u into «/ (Grammar, page 
96. J, and prefixes the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 73. J. Itpikn 
is of the first declension. 

715. <&ikt>K£a.rTis is declined like t^iv^vs- 

756. K«* makes its genitive like -^a^ (Grammar, page \S.J, and 
IItA(9T«y»j«-af is of the feminine gender. 

758., 759. Gtayl»r,s is declined like r^in^nt, Miya^x like the plural of 
\uKoi, and 'Q^itrrvs like rikunns. 

761. The genitive of xiias is syncopated and contracted, as in Gram- 
mar, jKige 25. ; and BKmw is declined like nXarov. 

766., 767. Txiyiro; is masculine ; r HX/j is feminine, and declined 
here like o$i{ (Grammar, page 23. ). 

787. Oi^Xxif belongs to the first declension. 

795. TtXivriuf is declined like ra/uictt. 

802., 803. 'A/tf{«*i»r)i; and B^air/Jaj are of the first declension. 

824. Tow instead of met is here used for the genitive of rig (Gram' 
mar, page 58. J. 

844. K{ct*» is declined like TLkdrvr, and H«Xvx,^arti( like fpdgflfc. 
15 



170 NOTES. 



864. In the first future w afo like x„* >> ■ -r, 
r and circumflexes the last s y l£ ^ " E ™* U ' 633 " dro P» 

J£ ; *T+* "e, and declined lite^^^^ 

888. Concerning the perfect midd]e ^ _ ^ 
898 ' A ^^is of the first declension. 
916. *I^«Vw is declined like T«*-i • t. 
also Note to Example 521. T '"«*ff'« » Example 231. See 

929. *ApnfSp is declined like £, w ^,. 

958. n g ^» ug forms its genitive like WU***. /^ 

q fin t, - , , . JN^r^r Grammar, page 18. J 

960. B.ftA.' w „ is declined like ^*^. * * J ' 

985. v O<rr, s here has SV« instead nf * . , 
. page 58.;. * ^ ° f **» ln tfa e dative (Grammar, 

991. See note to Example 661. 

Zi 2 Zf:; is dedined Iike •**■* - d ■**- ». a*. 
•A^iift r • K ^* w are deciined *« -*«*• 

M. 74/ S '" mng a " d " the ■*"* ^mLL, 

4T,nd^< naXW " " ^"^ like ^'^ n— *. lite 

^«^ia?, and AA.i« ? T V is masculine. 

1038. ^^ ,, ded . ned ae f>j ^ ^^^ 

In ' he P ' Ural *"** * ««ter ^ mm< „, w S6 , 

whir!; „!ri f :r ir;' 1 - e ,ike ^ • a ° d *• «- •— ^ 

E^pt'seT '^" !S te,, ' ned *"H(» -d tt^J M in 
1063. Ei w S„, is decIined , ike ^ ^^^^ ^ i 
1081. ©„ e «^| w is declined Hte t ^_ 
1118. K„V e « fa feminine, and ofthe ^^ dec]ension _ 
1133. A,„„^ w fa declined , ite r ^ BS( and ^ uk 

^ 4] 1160. »E^ fa feminine . Concera . ng ^ ^ ^ t() ^ 



NOTES. 171 

1163. "Elfydrns is declined as in example 260. ; but Tiyps, which 
there made to; in the genitive, here makes /Say. 

1166., 1168., 1169. E£'/3a/«, h.\ytinm;, and A7y/v«, are of the first 
declension ; "Av^ay, of the second ; and XaXKi^tv; is declined like 
(Zxo-tkius. 

1178. XjJo-jjj belongs to the first declension. 

1199. blagruas is declined like rapix;. 

1208. Yltivd.co in the third person singular present subjunctive con. 
tracts an into r, (Grammar, page 103. J. See note to Example 301. 

1256. A«£v here has louoo; in the genitive, by transposition for Vo^uo; • 
and xa^uo-cu, in this instance, makes fy*a< in the perfect passive, instead of 
the regular rpat. 

1261. 'A\xiGid$ris is declined like nkeivvt' 






H 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



LIBRARY OF 



CONGRESS 




003 038 323 



